Printronix Printer LQH HWTM User Manual

/LQH-HW™

Printers

IGP /PGL Technical

Reference Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

LineJet™ Printers

IGP /PGL Technical

Reference Manual

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hewlett-Packard makes no representations or warranties of any kind

regarding this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of

merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard shall not

be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this

material or for any damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or

consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance or

use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change

without notice.

This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No

part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated

in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,

electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of

Hewlett-Packard.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Trademark Acknowledgements

IBM is a registered trademark of the International Business Machines Corp.

IGP, LinePrinter Plus, PGL and Printronix are registered trademarks of

Printronix, Inc.

Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro Systems, Inc.

Hewlett-Packard and HP are registered trademarks, and LineJet is a

trademark of Hewlett-Packard Company.

This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefaces and Intellifont technology.

Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division, Miles Incorporated

(Agfa).

CG, Garth Graphic, Intellifont, and Type Director are registered trademarks,

and Shannon and CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division, Miles

Incorporated (Agfa). CG Bodoni, CG Century Schoolbook, CG Goudy Old

Style, CG Melliza, Microstyle, CG Omega, and CG Palacio are products of

Agfa Corporation. CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license

from The Monotype Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa.

Univers is a registered trademark of Linotype AG and/or its subsidiaries.

Letraset is a registered trademark, and Aachen, Revue and University Roman

are trademarks of Esselte Pendaflex Corporation.

Futura is a registered trademark of Fundición Tipográfica Neufville, S.A.

ITC Avant Garde Gothic, ITC Benguiat, ITC Bookman, ITC Century, ITC

Cheltenham, ITC Clearface, ITC Galliard, ITC Korinna, ITC Lubalin Graph,

ITC Souvenir, ITC Tiepolo, ITC Zapf Chancery, and ITC Zapf Dingbats are

registered trademarks of International Typeface Corporation.

Albertus, Gill Sans, and Times New Roman are registered trademarks, and

Monotype Baskerville is a trademark of The Monotype Corporation Plc,

registered in the U.S. Pat. and TM office and elsewhere.

Hiroshige and Marigold are trademarks of AlphaOmega Typography, Inc.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

1 Introduction........................................................... 13

About this Manual...................................................................................13

Warnings and Special Information ...................................................13

The IGP/PGL Emulation .........................................................................13

Features...........................................................................................13

How the IGP Operates .....................................................................14

Modes of Operation..........................................................................15

Alphanumeric Data...........................................................................22

Incremental Data..............................................................................22

2 Commands ........................................................... 23

IGP Command Standards.......................................................................23

Special Function Control Code (SFCC) ...........................................23

Semicolon (;)....................................................................................23

Uppercase........................................................................................23

Inline Commands .............................................................................23

Line Terminator ................................................................................24

Printable Character ..........................................................................24

Spaces .............................................................................................24

Command Parameters .....................................................................24

Form Name ......................................................................................24

Prompt..............................................................................................25

Numeric Values................................................................................25

Comments in Command Lines.........................................................25

Storing Data .....................................................................................25

Character Position.Dot Position (CP.DP) Format.............................26

Command Codes....................................................................................27

Data Fields for Alphanumeric and Incremental Data........................27

Dark Printing ...................................................................................28

Alphanumerics .................................................................................29

Alphanumerics, Incremental Fields ..................................................34

Alphanumerics, Incremental: Fixed Data Fields...............................38

Alphanumerics, Incremental: Dynamic Data Fields..........................40

Boxes ...............................................................................................43

Compressed Print (Density) .............................................................45

Configuration....................................................................................46

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Corners ............................................................................................49

Create ..............................................................................................51

Delete Form .....................................................................................52

Delete Logo......................................................................................53

Directory...........................................................................................53

Duplication, Horizontal .....................................................................54

Duplication, Vertical .........................................................................56

Emulation Switching.........................................................................57

End...................................................................................................57

Execute Form Mode.........................................................................58

Execute Form: General Format........................................................59

Execute Form: Electronic Vertical Format Unit ................................61

Execute Form: Dynamic Alphanumeric Data ...................................62

Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code Data ..........................................63

Execute Form: Dynamic Logo..........................................................64

Execute Form: Incremental Dynamic Data ......................................65

Execute Form: Overlay Data............................................................67

Expanded Print.................................................................................68

Font..................................................................................................69

Form Length.....................................................................................70

Ignore Sequence..............................................................................71

Line Spacing ....................................................................................71

Lines, Horizontal ..............................................................................72

Lines, Vertical...................................................................................73

Listen................................................................................................74

Logo Call..........................................................................................74

Logo Mode, Create ..........................................................................76

Normal Mode....................................................................................78

Page Number...................................................................................78

Paper................................................................................................79

Paper Instruction - Data Bit 8...........................................................79

Paper Instruction (PI) Enable/Disable..............................................80

Print File...........................................................................................80

Quiet.................................................................................................81

Recall ...............................................................................................81

Reset................................................................................................82

Reverse Print ...................................................................................82

Scale ................................................................................................83

Select Format...................................................................................84

Setup................................................................................................85

Special Function Control Code Change...........................................86

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

3 Bar Codes............................................................. 87

Overview.................................................................................................87

User-Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios...........................................89

PDF Character Sizes [PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]] ....................................90

Bar Codes...............................................................................................91

Codabar ...........................................................................................91

Code 39............................................................................................96

Code 93..........................................................................................102

Code 128A, 128B and 128C ..........................................................108

EAN 8.............................................................................................118

EAN 13...........................................................................................123

FIM .................................................................................................129

Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5 and ITF-14 ...........................135

Matrix .............................................................................................141

MSI.................................................................................................147

PDF417 ..........................................................................................153

POSTNET ......................................................................................158

PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX).........................................................163

Telepen ..........................................................................................167

UCC/EAN-128................................................................................173

UPC-A ............................................................................................185

UPC-E and UPC-E0.......................................................................191

UPCSHIP .......................................................................................198

UPS 11...........................................................................................203

Incremental Bar Code Fields ................................................................208

Incrementing Bar Code Data..........................................................208

Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields .......................................211

Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields ..................................212

Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields.......................................214

4 Form Examples and Exercises........................... 215

Form Examples....................................................................................215

Example: Basic Create Form .........................................................215

Example: Dynamic Data.................................................................218

Form Exercise.......................................................................................228

Creating a Box and Corners...........................................................228

Adding Horizontal and Vertical Lines .............................................230

Adding Fixed Alphanumeric Text ...................................................231

Adding a Bar Code.........................................................................233

Logo Exercise.......................................................................................236

Creating a Logo..............................................................................237

Form Design .........................................................................................239

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Page Layout Considerations..........................................................239

Planning the Form Layout..............................................................239

Creating a Form and Adding Form Components ...........................243

Directory Command..............................................................................247

Example .........................................................................................247

Delete Command..................................................................................248

Example .........................................................................................248

Solving Program Errors ........................................................................248

Example .........................................................................................249

5 Multinational Character Sets............................... 251

Introduction...........................................................................................251

Supported Character Sets..............................................................251

Character Addresses .....................................................................252

Making Character Substitutions .....................................................252

Accessing Characters and Character Sets...........................................253

OCR Character Sets ......................................................................253

Data Bit 8 .......................................................................................253

Power-Up Character Set Selection ................................................253

User-Defined Set Command (USET).............................................254

Character Set Selection Command (ISET) ....................................256

Multinational Character Sets..........................................................257

6 Error Codes ........................................................ 261

IGP/PGL Emulation Error Codes..........................................................261

Horizontal Line Errors ....................................................................262

Vertical Line Errors.........................................................................263

Box Errors ......................................................................................264

Corner Errors .................................................................................265

Alpha Errors ...................................................................................266

Logo Errors ....................................................................................267

Create Errors..................................................................................268

Execute Errors ...............................................................................269

Miscellaneous Errors......................................................................270

Bar Code Errors .............................................................................271

Reverse Print Errors.......................................................................273

Incremental Fields Errors...............................................................274

Multinational Character Set Errors.................................................274

A Standard ASCII Character Set ........................... 277

B Grid Programs and Samples.............................. 279

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

C Vertical Paper Motion......................................... 283

Introduction...........................................................................................283

Paper Motion Using Line Feeds and Form Feeds................................283

Paper Motion Using the PI Line (Relative Line Slewing) ......................283

Paper Motion Using the EVFU..............................................................285

General EVFU Programming .........................................................285

EVFU Programming Sequence......................................................285

Using the EVFU .............................................................................286

Clearing the EVFU Memory ...........................................................288

EVFU Example...............................................................................289

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Table of Contents

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Introduction

About this Manual

This manual explains how to use the IGP /PGL (Intelligent Graphics

Printing/Printronix Graphics Language) on line matrix printers. Use this

manual and your printer User’s Guide for complete printer-IGP compatibility.

Warnings and Special Information

Information requiring special attention is indicated under special headings.

Always read and comply with this information. The heading reveals the nature

of the information:

Warning

Caution

Note

Warning messages call attention to situations that

could hurt you or damage the equipment.

Conditions that could damage the printer or related

equipment.

A note gives you helpful hints about printer operation and

maintenance.

The IGP/PGL Emulation

The IGP/PGL emulation is the software-based Intelligent Graphics Processor

(IGP) for the line matrix printers. It is based on, and is compatible with, the

Printronix IGP-100/200/400 board using the Printronix Graphics Language

(PGL).

Features

On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels

with a “preprinted” look for each application. IGP programs control all graphic

functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and processing

time.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

The IGP/PGL Emulation

Graphic capabilities include boxes, vertical and horizontal lines with user-

selectable thickness, logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms

and graphic designs can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.

Alphanumeric data can appear as prepositioned “fixed” information (entered

when the form is created), can be overlayed onto the form (positioned in a

specific location after the form is created), or may be dynamically merged with

the form.

Selectable Bar Codes provide appropriate bar codes for your application,

using standard wide-to-narrow ratios. A wide selection of bar codes are

available: Codabar; Code 39; Code 93; Interleaved 2 of 5; German I-2/5; ITF-

14; FIM; Matrix; MSI A through D; Code 128 Subset A, B, and C; UCC/EAN-

128; EAN 8; EAN 13; PDF417; POSTNET; PostBar; Royal Mail; Telepen;

UPC-A; UPC-E and UPC-E0; UPCSHIP and UPS 11. UPC and EAN bar

codes can also specify add-on data.

Expanded and Compressed Character Print attract attention where

needed. Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a

wide range of character sizes up to 113 times the standard character size (up

to 11.3 inches wide and tall). Compressed print sizes of 12, 13, 15, and 17

characters per inch (cpi) are available.

Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,

expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees

clockwise or counterclockwise, or they can be printed upside down.

Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and add a variety of

print and shading features for a “customized” appearance to forms, reports,

and labels.

Reversed Print permits highlighting and contrasting by printing a dark

background around white characters.

Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.

You can identify individual numeric and bar code data fields, which include

automatic increment or decrement functions.

Scaling Capability permits graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to

retain their physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and vertical

density other than the base density of 60 x 72 dpi.

Multinational Character Sets provide 32 international character sets, each

96 characters in length. This feature also allows you to create your own

character sets using characters defined and stored in memory.

Extended Character Sets provide 33 extended character sets, these also

having 96 characters. These are also stored in memory.

How the IGP Operates

IGP is an emulation that allows printing of sophisticated graphics and bar

codes.

The printer performs commands based on the current mode. These modes

are discussed in more detail beginning on page 15.

When the printer is receiving or printing text, it is in Normal Mode. Any time

the printer is on and is not processing IGP commands, it is in Normal Mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Modes of Operation

When a Create Form command is issued, the printer moves from the Normal

Mode to the Create Form Mode.

When in the Create Form Mode, the user sends text, images, and bar code

data to the IGP. All of this data is stored in memory. An End statement

terminates the IGP data string. The printer returns to Normal Mode.

You can create as many forms as you wish and store them on your host.

These forms can then be downloaded from your host to the printer.

When you execute a form, you can print it as many times as you wish. This

saves you time downloading the form each time you want to print it.

Printer Operating Mode

What It Means

Normal Mode

Printer receives data

and prints text/graphics.

Create Form Mode

Execute Form Mode

Normal Mode

You send IGP commands

to the printer.

Printer prints the form designed

in Create Form Mode.

Printer returns

to Normal Mode.

Figure 1. IGP Modes

Modes of Operation

The IGP has five modes of operation that use specific command sequences

to control the IGP.

•

In the Normal Mode, the printer waits for an SFCC in order to perform IGP

functions.

In Quiet Mode, all IGP commands are ignored except the LISTEN

command.

In the Create Logo Mode the printer produces graphics such as forms,

logos, bar codes, and alphanumeric data.

The Execute Mode is the IGP printing mode, which controls when the

actual printing of the bar codes and graphics will occur.

In Create Form Mode, the printer produces graphics such as forms,

logos, bar codes, and alphanumeric data.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

The IGP/PGL Emulation

Normal Mode

Normal Mode commands print data in a line printer format until a Special

Function Control Code (SFCC) is detected.

Commands accessible in the Normal Mode are summarized in Table 1 and

fully described on the referenced page. Some Normal Mode commands can

also be used in other modes: Compressed Print, Expand, Ignore, Select

Format, and Vertical Line Spacing, which are Normal Mode commands, can

also be used in the Execute Form Mode; the Multinational Character Set

command can be used in the Normal or Create Modes. Carriage Return,

Form Feed, Line Feed, EVFU commands, and Paper Slew commands also

operate in the Normal Mode.

Note

All IGP commands must be entered in UPPERCASE, and

each command line must be followed immediately by a line

feed (or carriage return with line feed terminator) or a paper

motion command.

Quiet Mode

In this mode, the host processes all data as ASCII characters without any IGP

interpretation — the IGP is disabled and all IGP commands are ignored. The

IGP looks only for the (cc)LISTEN command.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Modes of Operation

Table 1. Normal Mode Commands

Description

Command

Mnemonic

Page #

Compressed Print

Configuration

Create

DENSITY

CONFIG

CREATE

Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch (cpi).

Reconfigures IGP/PGL parameters

Places the IGP in the Create Form Mode where all the Create

Form Mode commands are available to design form elements.

Create Logo

Delete Form

Directory

Purpose Prints the following information: (1) all defined forms and logos,

(2) logo assignment to forms, and (3) memory usage and

availability.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)DIRECTORY [;DISK]

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

DIRECTORY The Directory command; enter DIRECTORY.

DISK

Optional parameter to specify the forms and logos

stored on the flash memory. Enter DISK.

Comments As many forms and logos as printer memory allows may be

stored in IGP memory. If the memory is full, the form will not print;

available space in the memory must be at least the size of the

form being executed.

For more information, refer to the Directory Example on page

247.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Duplication, Horizontal

Purpose Defines both the number of times form elements are duplicated

horizontally and the spacing between each duplication.

Mode

CREATE

Format

HDUP; dup#; offset#

elements to be duplicated

HDUP;OFF

HDUP

dup#

The Horizontal Duplication command; enter HDUP.

Specifies number of times the entered form

element(s) will repeat horizontally. Enter a value

ranging from 1 through 512.

offset#

Specifies the horizontal offset to establish the

horizontal spacing between each duplication of the

form element(s) specified in the body of the

command. Enter a value in terms of dot or

character columns based on the Scale command

(page 83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26). The

offset is from starting column to starting column.

HDUP;OFF Terminates the Horizontal Duplication command;

enter HDUP;OFF. If not entered, the IGP expects

another form element to be defined for duplication.

A single HDUP command can define different types

of elements for duplication.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Duplication, Horizontal

Example The following example is a horizontal duplication of a series of

vertical lines. To illustrate positioning, starting row and column

are indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual

location on the page.

HDUP;14;4

(14 dupes with 4-character column spacing)

(Command to be duplicated horizontally)

(Note CP.DP format: 59.6)

VERT

1;10;59;59.6

1;10.3;58.9;59.9

1;11;58.6;60

1;11.3;58.3;60.3

1;12;58;60.6

1;12.3;58.3;60.3

1;13;58.6;60

1;13.3;58.9;59.9

STOP

(Terminates the duplicated element command)

(Terminates the horizontal duplication)

HDUP;OFF

COLUMN 10

COLUMN 11

COLUMN 12

COLUMN 13

ROW 58

DUPLICATING THE SET HORIZONTALLY 14 TIMES

ROW 60.6

COLUMN 13.3

COLUMN 12.3

COLUMN 11.3

COLUMN 10.3

hdup.ex

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Duplication, Vertical

Purpose Defines both the number of times elements are duplicated

vertically and the spacing between each duplication.

Mode

CREATE

Format

VDUP; dup#; offset#

elements to be duplicated

VDUP;OFF

VDUP

dup#

The Vertical Duplication command; enter VDUP.

Specifies number of times the entered form

element(s) will repeat vertically. Enter a value

ranging from 1 through 512.

offset#

Specifies the vertical offset to establish the vertical

spacing between each duplication of the form

element(s) specified in the body of the command.

Enter a value in terms of dot or character columns

based on the Scale command (page 83), or use the

CP.DP format (page 26). The offset is from starting

row to starting row.

VDUP;OFF Terminates the Vertical Duplication command;

enter VDUP;OFF. If not entered, the IGP expects

another form element to be defined for duplication.

A single VDUP command can define different types

of elements for duplication.

Example The following example is a vertical duplication of one horizontal

line. The line is duplicated three times. To illustrate positioning,

the starting row and column are indicated on the example but do

not necessarily reflect actual location on the page.

VDUP;3;2

HORZ

(3 duplications with 2-char. row spacing)

(Command to be duplicated vertically)

1;52;15;65

STOP

(Terminates the duplicated element command)

(Terminates the vertical duplication)

VDUP;OFF

COLUMN 15

COLUMN 65

ROW 52

ROW 54

ROW 56

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Emulation Switching

Purpose To switch the active emulation from PGL to the emulation

selected.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)EMULATION; emulation

EMULATION The Emulation Switch command.

emulation

Specifies the emulation to activate. Currently, the

only selection is VGL (Code V). Enter VGL. If VGL

is not the selection, this command is then ignored.

Comments This command is only processed when VGL is included in the

software package. If not, this command is simply ignored. The

switching of emulations causes PGL to perform a soft reset.

Therefore, front panel selections return to their saved state, and

all forms and logos resident in RAM memory are deleted.

End

Purpose Terminates the current mode of operation and must be used

before entering a new mode command (EXECUTE, LOGO,

NORMAL, or even CREATE).

Mode

CREATE

END

Format

Comments After the End command is received, the IGP flushes program

errors, stores the error-free portions of the form program just

completed, and then returns to the Normal mode. If the debug

slash (/) is included in the Create command, the program prints

with any corresponding error messages.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Execute Form Mode

How to Use the Execute Command

Forms are printed in the Execute Form mode. In addition to printing the form

in the Execute Form mode, variable data can also be entered onto the form

“dynamically” during the Execute Form mode. This dynamic data input during

the Execute Form mode includes page numbers, alphanumeric data fields,

and bar code data fields. Pagination, described on page 78, is performed in

the Execute Form mode. Dynamic alphanumeric and bar code data require

additional commands within the Execute Form mode.

The fastest method for repeated forms printing is to use the form feed

character. Rather than sending a series of Execute/Normal commands, which

slows the process by performing an open-print-close form sequence, the form

feed character instructs the IGP to start a new page with new EVFU, dynamic

and overlay data using the existing Execute commands for the form. The

EVFU Data-Dynamic Data-Overlay Data-Form Feed Character sequence can

be repeated indefinitely while maintaining the optimum print speed within the

original Execute command.

Note

When a form count is not specified, a single line spacing (or

a line containing overlay data) must always separate an

EXECUTE command from a NORMAL command.

To Execute Forms Rapidly

In order to save reloading time, the IGP remembers the last form executed.

However, a form must be loaded if it was not the last form executed, if it was

used with a CREATE command since the last EXECUTE, or if any logo has

been created.

When the form is found in memory, it is loaded and execution resumes;

otherwise, the “FORM NOT FOUND” error is printed.

Print Formats in the Execute Form Mode

The Execute Form mode has two print formats. The standard execute

command format, shown on the next page, is used for executing

nonincremental data and incremental fixed data. An incremental execute

command format, containing two additional parameters, is used for executing

incremental dynamic data and is discussed on page 65.

During the Execute Form mode, the IGP responds to regular print format

commands such as 8 lpi, and elongated characters. Some commands can be

used in other modes in addition to the Execute Form mode. For example,

Compressed Print, Expanded Print, Execute, Ignore, Select Format, and

Vertical Line Spacing, which are also Normal mode commands, can be used

in the Execute or Create Form modes. The IGP alternate character set can

also be used in the Execute Form mode.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form: General Format

Purpose Prints forms created in the CREATE mode.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)EXECUTE ;formname [;PAGEn] [;FC] [;ICNTn] [;IRSTn]

[;DISK] [EVFU Data]

[(cc)AFn; (D)ASCII text(D)]

[(cc)BFn; (D)data(D)]

[(cc)GFn; (D)logoname(D)]

[(cc)IAFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;](D)STARTDATA(D)]

[(cc)IBFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;](D)STARTDATA(D)]

[Overlay Data]

[Form Feed character]

(cc)NORMAL

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

EXECUTE The Execute Form command; enter EXECUTE.

formname

PAGEn

Identifies a previously defined form by name. Enter

the form name exactly as used when created.

The optional Pagination command; enter PAGE

and replace n with the decimal number of the

starting page in a sequence of multiple pages. The

number may be eight digits long and range

between 0 and 99999999. The next page after

99999999 is 0. Leave a blank space between the

PAGE command and the n value. The page

number will print on the form in the location defined

by the Page Number command in the Create Form

mode. If the location of the pagination field was not

specified in the Create Form mode, the page field is

printed in the upper left corner of the form.

The optional form count parameter specifies the

number of copies of the form to print. Enter the

appropriate number. When the last page prints, the

IGP returns to the Normal mode automatically.

Note

Do not use the form count parameter if dynamic data (AFn

and BFn parameters), incremental data (ICNT or IRST

parameters), overlay data, or EVFU data are used in the

Execute command.

ICNTn

The optional incremental form count. Enter ICNT

and the Incremental value as described in the

Execute Incremental Dynamic Data command

described on page 65.

IRSTn

The optional incremental reset count parameter.

Enter IRST and the reset value as described in the

Execute Incremental Dynamic Data command

described on page 65.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

DISK

Optional parameter that specifies to recall the form

from the flash memory. Enter DISK.

EVFU Data Optional parameter to use the EVFU to overlay

data onto the form. (“EVFU Data” is not part of the

Execute command. It is shown in the command

sequence to indicate that actual EVFU data can be

entered following the Execute command.) Enter

EVFU data as described in Appendix C and on

page 61.

(cc)AFn;(D)ASCII text(D)

The Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data

command. Enter the dynamic alphanumeric data

during the Execute Form mode as described in

“Execute Form: Dynamic Alphanumeric Data” on

page 62.

(cc)BFn ;(D)data(D)

The Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data command.

Enter the dynamic bar code data during the

Execute Form mode as described in “Execute

Form: Dynamic Bar Code Data” on page 63.

(cc)GFn;(D)logoname(D)

The Execute Dynamic Logo Command. Enter the

name of the logo during the Execute Form mode as

described in “Execute Form: Dynamic Logo” on

page 64.

(cc)IAFn;[idir] STEPMASK;[RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)

The Execute Incremental Dynamic Alphanumeric

Data command. Supply the data as described on

page 66.

(cc)IBFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)

The Execute Incremental Dynamic Bar Code Data

command. Supply the data as described on page

66.

Overlay Data Overlay data can be entered during the Execute

Form mode. (The words “Overlay Data” are not part

of the Execute command. They are shown in the

command sequence to indicate that actual overlay

data can be entered following the Execute

command.) Refer to “Execute Form: Overlay Data”

on page 67.

Form Feed Character

Optional command instructing the IGP to start a

new page with new EVFU, dynamic, and overlay

data using the existing Execute commands for the

current form. Using this EVFU Data-Dynamic Data

and Overlay Data-Form Feed Character sequence

can be repeated indefinitely, while maintaining the

optimum print speed, within the original Execute

command.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form: Electronic Vertical Format Unit

(cc)NORMAL The Normal mode command. If the form count

parameter was not used in the Execute command,

enter the SFCC and NORMAL to return the IGP to

the Normal mode. The Normal mode command is

input following all other Execute commands to

enter variable data. (Refer to the following

sections.) Input a line terminator to leave a blank

line before entering the Normal command.

Execute Form: Electronic Vertical Format Unit

Purpose Provides an efficient method of rapidly slewing paper.

Mode

EXECUTE

Format

See Appendix C.

Comments The Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU) is processed as

overlay data within the Execute Form mode. Detailed EVFU

information is provided in Appendix C.

The EVFU must be loaded while in the Execute Form mode and immediately

following the Execute command. After executing the form and returning to

Normal mode, the EVFU information is automatically deleted from printer

memory. To print the form again, re-send the EVFU command.

Several key points to operating the EVFU are listed below.

•

Send EVFU commands immediately following the Execute command or

the format form feeds.

•

The EVFU can be unloaded by issuing an END LOAD command only.

The number of lines slewed is dictated by the current line spacing (lpi)

setting.

•

In those circumstances where the EVFU is being used to control the

forms length only, the IGP forms length parameter can be used in place of

the EVFU.

•

The maximum number of EVFU channels is 192.

Changing the LPI unloads the EVFU.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Execute Form: Dynamic Alphanumeric Data

Purpose Incorporates the dynamic alphanumeric data into a previously

identified location on a form.

Mode

EXECUTE

Format

(cc)AFn; (D)ASCII text(D)

(cc)

AFn

The Special Function Control Code.

Indicates a dynamic alphanumeric field (AF) and its

data (n). Enter AF and replace n with the number of

the data field corresponding to the number used to

identify the field when it was defined with the

Alphanumeric command in the Create Form mode.

(D)

The printable character identifying the start and

finish of the alphanumeric data. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field but will

not be printed with the data.

ASCII text

The group of ASCII characters (the alphanumeric

string) to print. Enter any of the standard ASCII

printable characters (except the character used as

delimiters described in the (D) parameter). The

data appears on the form at the location identified

by the value of n.

Note

Be sure to enter Dynamic Alphanumeric Data after the

Execute command and/or EVFU data but before any

Overlay Data. (See the general Execute command format on

page 59.)

Comments The location for the dynamic alphanumeric data must have been

previously identified using the AFn;L parameters of the

alphanumerics command in the Create Form mode. Inputting

individual commands enters the new data into the identified

location each time the form is printed.

You can repeat the (cc)AFn;(D)ASCII text(D) sequence to

complete as many data fields as you defined on the form in the

Create Form mode. You can also combine the Execute Dynamic

Bar Code Data command in the same Execute command

sequence. Each “page” of dynamic data (the dynamic fields,

data, and overlay data) for the form must be separated from the

next page of new dynamic data by a form feed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code Data

Purpose Incorporates the dynamic bar code data into a previously

identified location on a form.

Mode

EXECUTE

Format

(cc)BFn; (D)data field(D)

(cc)

BFn

The Special Function Control Code.

Indicates a dynamic bar code field (BF) and its data

(n). Enter BF and replace n with the number of the

data field corresponding to the number used to

identify the field when it was defined with the bar

code command during the Create Form mode.

(D)

The printable character (quotation marks for

example) identifying the start and finish of the bar

code data. Enter any printable character other than

a slash (/), the SFCC, or a character used within

the data. The same character must be used at both

ends of the data field but will not be printed.

data field

Enter the characters for the bar code data. The

character types allowed in the data varies with the

bar code type. Refer to the data field descriptions

for the selected bar code types. The data appears

on the form at the location identified by n.

Note

Be sure to enter Dynamic Bar Code Data after the Execute

command and/or EVFU data but before any Overlay Data.

(See the general Execute command format on page 59.)

Comments The bar code location must have been previously identified using

the BFn;L or BFn parameters of a bar code command in the

Create Form mode. Use the appropriate bar code command to

enter the bar code data in that location. Inputting individual

commands enters new bar code data into the identified location

each time the form is printed. You can repeat the (cc)BFn;(D)data

field(D) sequence to complete as many bar code data fields as

were defined on the form in the Create Form mode. You can also

combine the Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data command in

the same Execute command sequence. Each “page” of dynamic

data (the dynamic fields, data, and overlay data) for the form

must be separated from the next page of new dynamic data by a

form feed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Execute Form: Dynamic Logo

Purpose Incorporates the dynamic graphic logo into a previously identified

location of a form.

Mode

EXECUTE

Format

(cc)GFn;(D)logoname(D)

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

GFn

Indicates the dynamic logo field. Enter GF and

replace n with the number of the field

corresponding to when it was defined with the Logo

Call command during the CREATE form mode.

(D)

The printable character identifying the start and

finish of the logo name. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the name. The same

character must be used at both ends of the data

field but will not be included in the logo name.

logoname

Enter the logo name. If the logo is not found in

DRAM, the flash memory is searched.

Comments The logo location must have been previously identified using the

GFn parameters of a logo call command in the Create Form

mode. Then use the appropriate logo command to enter the logo

data in that location. Inputting individual commands enters new

logo data into the identified location each time the form is printed.

You can repeat the (cc)GFn;(D)logoname(D) sequence to

complete as many logo fields as were defined on the form in the

Create Form mode. You can also combine the Execute Dynamic

Alphanumeric Data command in the same Execute command

sequence. Each “page” of dynamic data (the dynamic fields,

data, and overlay data) for the form must be separated from the

next page of new dynamic data by a form feed.

NOTE: There are no incremental logos.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form: Incremental Dynamic Data

Purpose Incorporates incremental/decremental capability to dynamic

alphanumeric or bar code data supplied as a part of the Execute

Form mode.

Mode

NORMAL

Note

In the command below, incremental execute parameters are

shown in boldface type; standard execute command

parameters are shown in italics. The general execute format

is shown on page 59.

Format

(cc)EXECUTE; formname [;PAGE n] [;FC] [;ICNTn] [;IRSTn]

ICNTn

Identifies the incremental form count to specify the

number of forms to generate with the incremental

fields automatically updated. Enter ICNT and

replace n with a value ranging from 1 through

65,535 to specify the number of forms.

IRSTn

The optional incremental reset count parameter to

specify the number of forms to generate before

resetting all incremental fields to their starting

values. The reset count parameter is useful in

dividing the total number of forms generated into

multiple groups of identical copies. To use this

parameter, enter IRST and replace n with a value

ranging from 1 through 65,535 to specify the reset

count (how many forms generated before resetting

the incremental fields). If the reset count value is

equal to or greater than the incremental count

value, the reset will never occur.

Example The following forms were generated from ICNT6, IRST2. (To

duplicate incremental fields within a form, refer to page 40.)

form1

form2

form3

form4

form5

form6 = ICNT6

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Supplying Dynamic Data for Incremental Fields

Incremental dynamic data fields are created in the Create Form mode using

the incremental alphanumeric or bar code commands. The incremental

dynamic data itself is supplied during the Execute Form mode at the top of the

form prior to any overlay data. The incremental dynamic data (either

alphanumeric or bar code data) can be changed with each new batch of

forms. Incremental dynamic data fields specified in the Create Form mode will

not appear on the form if corresponding incremental dynamic data is not

supplied in the Execute Form mode.

Format

For incremental dynamic alphanumeric data:

(cc)IAFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)

For incremental dynamic bar code data:

(cc)IBFn; [idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)

(cc)

IAF

The Special Function Control Code.

Identifies the command as an incremental

alphanumeric dynamic data; enter IAF.

IBF

Identifies the command as an incremental bar code

dynamic data; enter IBF.

Identifies the field number of the dynamic data field

as entered in the Create Form mode. Replace n

with the number used to identify the field when it

was defined.

idir

The optional increment direction parameter to

specify an increase or decrease of the data. Enter a

plus sign (+) or leave the field blank to increment

(the default). Enter a minus sign (-) to decrement.

STEPMASK Defines the increment amount (step), the number

of character positions in the data field, and provides

a mask to control the increment function on specific

parts of the data. Refer to “Incremental Bar Code

Fields” on page 208 or “Alphanumerics,

Incremental Fields” on page 34 for complete

information on STEPMASK parameter values.

RPTn

The optional incremental repeat count parameter to

specify the number of times a particular field value

is repeated before it is incremented. A repeated

field value is useful when printing multiple

rows/columns of identical labels before

incrementing to the next value. To use the repeat

count parameter, enter RPT and replace n with a

numeric value ranging from 1 through 65,535 to

specify the repeat count. The default repeat count

parameter is 1, which will increment the field value

each time it is printed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Form: Overlay Data

RSTn

The optional incremental reset count parameter to

specify the number of times an incremented field is

printed (on one or more forms) before it is reset to

the starting value. A reset count is useful when

printing a hierarchy of fields where a low-level field

generates a sequence of numbers, is reset, and the

next higher field level is incremented (such as in a

unit/box/carton application). To use the reset count

parameter, enter RST and replace n with a number

ranging from 1 through 65,535 to specify the reset

count. The default reset count value is 0.

STARTDATA Defines the starting value of the incrementing field.

The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters

must be equal to or less than the number of

characters in the STEPMASK field. If the number of

data characters in the Dynamic Alphanumeric Data

command is less than the number used in

STEPMASK, the data will print right justified with

preceding spaces. (Leading spaces are not

provided for bar code data.) For dynamic bar code

data, the type of characters allowed for

incrementing fields is based on the type of bar

code. Refer to the individual bar code descriptions

in the “Bar Codes” chapter for information on valid

type and quantity of data characters. The

STARTDATA must be enclosed within standard

printable character delimiters just as a standard

data field is enclosed within delimiters.

Execute Form: Overlay Data

Overlay data is variable alphanumeric data entered onto a predefined form.

The form is completed by positioning the data in the exact location it will

appear on the form when printed. The data is placed horizontally using tabs

and spaces, and vertically using line feeds, form feeds, and the Electronic

Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).

For example, if the serial number field on the form begins at character row 22

and column 14, enter 22 line feeds, space over 14 columns, and input serial

number overlay data. An entire form can be completed with a page of overlay

data in this manner. Overlay data at the end of a form is printed on a new form

until all overlay data is used. Then, to advance to the next form, use a form

feed.

The IGP EVFU can be used to control vertical spacing of the overlay data. In

place of line feed commands input individually, the EVFU can be programmed

(during the Execute Form mode) to slew the overlay data to the

predetermined line with a single command.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Expanded Print

Purpose Selects font sizes other than the default font.

Mode

NORMAL, EXECUTE

(cc)EXPAND; VE; HE

Format

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

EXPAND

The Expanded Print command; enter EXPAND.

Specifies the vertical expansion factor; enter a

value ranging from 0 through 113.

Specifies the horizontal expansion factor; enter a

value ranging from 0 through 113. Both VE and HE

parameters must be zero or non-zero. If one

expansion value is 0, they must both be 0. A VE or

HE setting of 1 expands the appropriate plane but

produces single-size characters. A VE and HE

setting of 0 produces standard-size characters.

Comments The Expanded Print command uses the 0.10-inch, 10 cpi Gothic

typeface as the default base value from which alphanumeric

characters are expanded.

The character height can be up to a maximum of 11.3 inches,

which means if a page is 11.3 inches high, you can print a

character that fills the entire height of the page.

After an Expanded Print command is entered, all subsequent

alphanumerics print at the specified expansion until another

Expanded Print command, a Normal Mode command, or a Reset

command is entered. An Expanded Print command with VE and

HE set to 0 selects standard character printing.

Example The following command results in character printing at 25 times

its vertical size and 40 times its horizontal size.

~EXPAND;25;40

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Font

Purpose Selects typefaces other than the default Gothic font.

Mode

NORMAL, CREATE, EXECUTE

Format

(cc)FONT [;FACE #] [;BOLD #] [;SLANT #] [;SYMSET #]

[;POINT #] [;SPACE #]

Note

The font is activated according to the changed options upon

receipt of the font command.

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code. (If you are

using the Font command in the CREATE mode, do

not enter the SFCC.)

FONT

The Font command; enter FONT.

FACE #

Identifies the specific typeface. This option is

ignored for line matrix printers.

BOLD #

Selects a bold attribute. Enter BOLD, a space, and

ON or 1 to turn bold on, or OFF or 0 for no bold

attribute.

SLANT #

Selects a slanting factor. (Slant is similar to italic,

but also offers a backward slant.) Enter SLANT, a

space, and RIGHT or 1 for a typical italic slant,

LEFT or -1 for a backward slant, or OFF or 0 for no

slant attribute.

SYMSET # Selects a font symbol set other than the default

ASCII symbol set. Enter SYMSET, a space, and a

value representing the symbol set as identified in

Table 21 on page 251.

POINT #

Selects the point size for the current typeface.

Enter POINT, a space, and a point size ranging

from 4 through 999. Point sizes are available in

quarter-point increments. Horizontal pitch is

automatically adjusted based on the point size

selected.

The point parameter cannot be used when in

CREATE mode. Use the point parameter of the

ALPHA command.

SPACE #

Selects a spacing alignment scheme, where

applicable. Enter SPACE, a space, followed by a

value 0 through 3.

Comments Font parameters in Normal and Execute modes do not affect the

fonts that have already been established and saved on a form.

Font commands issued in the Create mode affect only the current

form being created and not any of the fonts on other forms or for

Execute or Normal mode text.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

You can use any or all Font parameters, listed in any order, in a

single Font command. (Do not list font parameters on separate

lines.) Parameters and symbol sets not specified retain the

previously selected value. Parameters incorrectly specified retain

the previously selected value.

All Font command parameters are reset to default values upon

receiving a NORMAL, RESET, CONFIG;RESET, or new

CREATE command. Multiple font commands within a single form

will save the last font command parameters specified. Symbol

sets can also be selected using the ISET or USET commands.

(Refer to Chapter 5.)

To change font width and height, use the Compressed Print

(Density) or Expanded Print commands described on pages 47

and 72, respectively.

Example The following command prints the current font bolded with a right

slant. This font will continue to print until another Font command,

a Normal mode command, or a Reset command is entered.

~FONT;BOLD ON;SLANT RIGHT

Form Length

Purpose Sets the length of the form to a specific number of lines at 6 or 8

lpi.

Mode

CREATE

Format

LFORM6; n or LFORM8; n

LFORM6

LFORM8

The Form Length command for 6 lpi forms; enter

LFORM6.

The Form Length command for 8 lpi forms; enter

LFORM8.

Specifies the form length in total number of lines

allowed per form. The range depends on the paper

size used. An error message will result if the

maximum line values are exceeded.

Note

This command affects only printed text inside of IGP forms,

not the printer lpi. The LFORM8 command considers a line

as 9 dot rows; the LFORM6 command considers a line as 12

dot rows. The 9 and 12 dot rows per line matches the dot

rows of the printer in the DP mode if set to 8 or 6 lpi,

respectively.

Example The following example establishes a form length of 8 inches (48

lines at 6 lpi):

LFORM6;48

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Ignore Sequence

Purpose Enables the IGP to ignore all characters after the Ignore

Sequence On (IGON) command is entered. All characters are

ignored until the Ignore Sequence Off (IGOFF) command is

entered.

Mode

NORMAL, CREATE, or EXECUTE

(cc)IGON or (cc)IGOFF

Format

Note

A line terminator is not required in the Ignore Sequence.

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

Ignore Sequence On command; enter IGON.

Exits Ignore Sequence; enter IGOFF.

IGON

IGOFF

Comments IGON and IGOFF can also be used anywhere in the data stream.

Line Spacing

Purpose Defines the lines per inch (lpi) printing format.

Mode

NORMAL, EXECUTE

(cc)LPI; n

Format

(cc)

LPI

The Special Function Control Code.

The Vertical Line Spacing command; enter LPI.

Selects the line spacing in lpi; enter 6, 8, 9, or 10.

Comments Standard line spacing is 6 lpi. After a Vertical Line Spacing

command is entered, all subsequent alphanumerics print at the

specified lpi until another Vertical Line Spacing command, a

Normal Mode command, or a Reset command is entered.

Example The following command selects 9 lpi printing format until another

Line Spacing command, a Normal Mode command, or a Reset

command is entered.

~LPI;9

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Lines, Horizontal

Purpose Defines horizontal lines.

Mode

CREATE

Format

HORZ

LT; R; SC; EC

STOP

HORZ

The Horizontal Line command; enter HORZ.

Defines the line thickness, measured in 1/72-inch

dots. Enter a value of 1 or greater. Horizontal line

thickness expands downward from the given row.

Defines the row to draw the horizontal line. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 through one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

Defines the starting column of the horizontal line.

Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one

less than the width of the form. Character column

or dot column is specified based on the Scale

command (page 83), or use the CP.DP format

(page 26).

Defines the ending column of the horizontal line.

Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the

last column of the form. The ending column must

be greater than the starting column. Character

column or dot column is specified based on the

Scale command (page 83), or use the CP.DP

format (page 26).

STOP

Stop indicates the end of the HORZ command;

enter STOP. If not entered, the IGP expects

another set of Horizontal Line command

parameters.

Example The following example specifies 2 horizontal lines. The first line

uses the character row in the R parameter, and the second line

uses CP.DP format. To illustrate positioning, the starting row and

column are indicated on the example but do not necessarily

reflect actual location on the page.

HORZ

1;60;15;65

1;60.5;15;65

STOP

COLUMN 15

COLUMN 65

ROW 60

ROW 60.5

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Lines, Vertical

Purpose Defines vertical lines.

Mode

CREATE

Format

VERT

LT; C; SR; ER

STOP

VERT

The Vertical Line command; enter VERT.

Defines the line thickness, measured in 1/60-inch

dots. Enter a value of 1 or greater. Vertical line

thickness expands to the right from the starting

column.

Defines the column where the vertical line begins.

Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one

less than the width of the form. Character column

or dot column is specified based on the Scale

command (page 83), or use the CP.DP format

(page 26).

Defines the starting row of the vertical line. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 through one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

Defines the ending row of the vertical line. Enter a

value ranging from row 2 through the last row of the

form. The ending row must be greater than the

starting row. Character row or dot row is specified

based on the Scale command (page 83), or use the

CP.DP format (page 26).

STOP

Stop indicates the end of the VERT command;

enter STOP. If not entered, the IGP expects

another set of Vertical Line command parameters.

Example The following program specifies 4 vertical lines. To illustrate

positioning, the starting row and column are indicated on the

example but do not necessarily reflect actual location on the

page.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

VERT

2;36;53;61

2;50;53;61

2;60;53;61

2;70;53;61

STOP

COLUMN 36

COLUMN 50

ROW 53

ROW 61

vert.ex

Listen

Purpose Disables the IGP from the quiet state and enables the IGP for

standard operation. (The Quiet command is explained on page

81.)

Mode

NORMAL

(cc)LISTEN

(cc)

Format

The Special Function Control Code.

LISTEN

The Listen command; enter LISTEN.

Note

When the IGP is in the quiet state, P-Series line printer

emulation commands are active. Refer to your LinePrinter

Plus Programming Reference Manual for descriptions of

these commands.

Logo Call

Purpose Selects and positions a previously defined logo. (The logo itself is

actually defined separately in the Create Logo mode.) The logo is

defined using IGP dots.

Mode

CREATE

Format

LOGO

SR; SC; logoname [;DISK]

STOP

LOGO

The Logo Call command; enter LOGO.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Logo Call

Defines the starting row of the logo. The SR (and

SC) parameter specifies the location for the logo

based on the upper left corner of the grid in which

the logo was defined. Enter a value ranging from

row 1 through one less than the length of the form.

Character row or dot row is specified based on the

Scale command (page 83), or use the CP.DP

format (page 26).

Defines the starting column of the logo. The SC

(and SR) parameter specifies the location for the

logo based on the upper left corner of the grid in

which the logo was defined. Enter a value ranging

from column 1 through one less than the width of

the form. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

logoname

Identifies a previously defined logo by name for use

on the form. Enter the logo name exactly as used to

define and store the logo.

DISK

Optional parameter to retrieve logo from the flash

memory. Enter DISK.

STOP

Stop indicates the end of the LOGO command;

enter STOP, and the IGP will wait for a new

command. If not entered, the IGP expects another

set of Logo Call command parameters.

Example The following sample program specifies three logo calls placing

the same logo at three different locations. (The logo was

previously defined and stored.) The starting row and column

specify the upper left corner of the grid in which the logo was

defined. To illustrate positioning, the starting row and column are

indicated on the example but do not necessarily reflect actual

location on the page.

LOGO

56;35;HAND

56;50;HAND

56;65;HAND

STOP

SR 56

SC 35

SC 50

SC 65

logocall.e

Note

When the logo to be executed is not found in memory, the

“LOGO NOT FOUND” error is printed.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Logo Mode, Create

Purpose Places the IGP in the Create Logo mode, where logos can be

defined using the appropriate dot placements.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)LOGO; logoname; VL; HL [;DISK]

row#; dot; dot1-dot2; dot

END

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

LOGO

logoname

The Logo command; enter LOGO.

Enter a maximum of 15 alphanumeric characters

for the name of the logo. (Refer to page 24 for a list

of allowable Logo Name characters.) All future

references to this logo (Delete Logo or Logo Call

commands) must use this name. If a logo is defined

with the same name as a logo already existing in

memory, the newly defined logo will replace the

existing logo.

Defines the vertical length of the logo grid in dot

rows; enter a value sufficient for the vertical size of

the logo, not exceeding 252. The dot rows are

vertically spaced 1/72-inch apart.

Defines the horizontal length of the logo grid in dot

columns; enter a value sufficient for the horizontal

size of the logo, not exceeding 240. On each row,

the dots are horizontally spaced 1/60-inch apart.

DISK

row#

Optional parameter to store the logo on the flash

memory. Enter DISK.

Identifies the row number for each row of dots in

the logo. Enter each row number on a separate

command line. Rows are numbered sequentially

from top to bottom.

dot

Identifies a single dot position in the row. Enter

each dot number used. Dots are numbered

sequentially from left to right.

dot1-dot2

Identifies a series of dot positions within the row,

including dot1 on the left end and dot2 on the right

end. Enter the series of dot rows. Series of dot rows

can be combined with single dot positions in the

same command line.

END

Terminates the Create Logo mode; enter END.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Logo Mode, Create

Comments The logo is defined by specifying the overall size and the rows of

data used. The actual number of logos you can create and store

depends on the memory required for each logo.

The maximum logo size allowed is 252 rows high (3.5 inches)

and 240 columns wide (4 inches). Values exceeding either of

these dimensions will produce an error. To maximize memory

space, do not define the vertical and horizontal length of the logo

grid larger than is required to capture the design. The printer

produces a grid with 72 dots per inch vertically and 60 dots per

inch horizontally. Consequently, a logo must be designed using

this scale.

The Logo Call command (page 74) in the Create Form mode

brings the predefined logo into a form. The starting row and

column parameters refer to the upper left corner of the logo grid.

Once created, the logo is ready to be used in any form and will

print at the size shown.

~LOGO;TAPEHOLD;36;40

1;12-18

2;10-20

3;9-22

4;8-24

5;7-25

6;6-26

7;5-26

8;4-25

9;4-25

10;3-24

11;3-24

12;2-23

13;2-23

14;2-14;17-23

15;1-12;19-22;38-39

16;1-12;20-23;37-40

17;1-11;20-23;37-40

18;1-11;20-23;36-40

19;1-11;20-23;36-40

20;1-11;20-23;35-40

VL 36

21;1-12;20-24;35-40

22;1-12;19-24;34-39

23;1-14;17-25;33-39

24;1-28;31-39

25;1-39

TAPELOGO.EX

HL 40

26;2-38

27;2-38

28;2-37

29;3-37

30;3-36

31;3-36

32;4-35

33;5-34

34;6-33

35;7-32

36;9-30

END

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Normal Mode

Purpose Places the IGP in the Normal mode of operation, where the data

stream is not changed but monitored for a Special Function

Control Code followed by an IGP command.

Mode

NORMAL, EXECUTE

(cc)NORMAL

Format

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

The Normal mode command; enter NORMAL.

NORMAL

Comments Normal mode is entered automatically when the printer is

powered on with IGP. In Normal mode, the IGP uses the default

font and line spacing values.

A blank line or overlay data must always separate an EXECUTE

command from a NORMAL command, unless a form count is

given for the EXECUTE.

Page Number

Purpose Defines where a page number is placed on a form and

automatically increases the page number on each page.

Mode

CREATE

Format

PAGE; SR; SC

PAGE

The Page Number command; enter PAGE.

Defines the starting row of the page number. Enter

a value ranging from row 1 through one less than

the length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

Defines the starting column of the page number.

Enter a value ranging from column 1 through one

less than the width of the form. Character column

or dot column is specified based on the Scale

command (page 83), or use the CP.DP format

(page 26).

If the SR or SC extends beyond the page

boundaries, an Error 76 will occur in the Execute

Form mode, and default page number SR SC

values are used.

Comments To begin automatically incrementing the page numbers, the

starting page number must be specified during the Execute

command.

Example The following command places the page numbers at row 60

column 70 on the form.

PAGE;60;70

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Paper

Purpose Controls printer paper options.

Mode

NORMAL, EXECUTE

(cc)PAPER [;option]

Format

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

The PAPER command; enter PAPER.

PAPER

EJECT

Prints all pages that are in the buffer. Enter EJECT.

This is currently the only PAPER command

available for line matrix printers.

Paper Instruction - Data Bit 8

Purpose Enables or disables data bit 8 as the paper instruction signal

when the IGP is configured for a serial interface. (This command

has no effect on a parallel interface.)

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)PION or (cc)PIOFF

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

PION

The Data Bit 8 Paper Instruction On command;

enter PION. When this command is sent, 7 data

bits are allowed; data bit 8 is enabled as the paper

instruction.

When data bit 8 is set high, the PION command

slews paper. When data bit 8 is set low, the PION

command prints data characters.

PIOFF

The Data Bit 8 Paper Instruction Off command;

enter PIOFF. When this command is sent, 8 data

bits are allowed for character data because data bit

8 is disabled as the paper instruction. Subsequent

occurrences of data bit 8 in the data stream cause

printing from the extended character set.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Paper Instruction (PI) Enable/Disable

Purpose Enables or disables use of the PI line using a parallel I/O device.

(This command does not enable/disable PI line sensing; it

enables or disables use of the “sensed” PI line.)

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)EN-PI or (cc)DIS-PI

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

EN-PI

The Enable PI command; enter EN-PI. When this

command is enabled, the IGP senses PI line, the 8

bits of data are interpreted as a paper instruction

command, and the PI line itself is ignored.

DIS-PI

The Disable PI command; enter DIS-PI. When the

Disable PI command is sent, the 8 bits of data are

interpreted as printable characters, and not as a

paper instruction command.

Print File

Purpose Prints files from the flash memory. Print File can be used to show

the SETUP functions that exist.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)PRINT; filename

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

filename

The Print File command; enter PRINT.

The filename to be printed.

Comments Do not use wildcard characters because the Print File command

will attempt to print any file on the flash.

Example Example of how to print setup.ptx:

~PRINT;SETUP.PTX

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Quiet

Purpose Places the IGP in the Quiet mode, where all data passed to the

ASCII emulation is unaffected by IGP commands except for the

LISTEN, SFON/SFOFF, and IGON/IGOFF.

Mode

NORMAL

(cc)QUIET

(cc)

Format

The Special Function Control Code.

QUIET

The Quiet command; enter QUIET. The IGP

remains in the quiet state until the Listen command

is received.

Comments In the Quiet mode IGP ignores all commands except LISTEN,

SFON/SFOFF, and IGON/IGOFF. All commands for the currently

selected protocol in the ASCII emulation will be interpreted.

The IGP remains quiet until the LISTEN command (page 74)

enables standard IGP operation. The Quiet command is ignored

if the IGP is in the Execute Form mode.

Recall

Purpose Loads the user pre-stored program setup file, setup.ptx, from

flash memory into the printer. This is done without sending a

system reset.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)RECALL

Comments The file setup.ptx is also automatically recalled into the printer

upon a RESET command.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Reset

Purpose Deletes all forms and logos from IGP memory. The Reset

performs the following tasks:

•

Prints any objects in the current page

Deletes all forms and logos resident in memory

Sets the font to the default Gothic 12 point/10CPI

Releases all user defined character mappings

•

Runs the SETUP.PTX file if present

NORMAL or EXECUTE

(cc)RESET

Mode

Format

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

RESET

The Reset command; enter RESET.

Reverse Print

Purpose Defines an area of the form where form elements are reverse

printed (white on black).

Mode

CREATE

Format

REVERSE

[DARK;] SR; SC; ER; EC

STOP

REVERSE The Reverse Printing command; enter REVERSE.

DARK

Optional parameter to select a denser black

background. Enter DARK, or D, to select the

denser background. More information about dark

printing is provided on page 28.

Defines the starting row of the reverse print field.

Enter a value ranging from row 1 through one less

than the length of the form. Character row or dot

row is specified based on the Scale command

(page 83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

Defines the starting column of the reverse print

field. Enter a value ranging from column 1 through

one less than the width of the form. Character

column or dot column is specified based on the

Scale command (page 83), or use the CP.DP

format (page 26).

Defines the ending row of the reverse print field.

Enter a value ranging from row 2 through the last

row of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Scale

If the ending row is less than the starting row, the

rows are automatically switched. The same is done

with the ending and starting column.

Defines the ending column of the reverse print field.

Enter a value ranging from column 2 through the

last column of the form. The ending column must

be greater than the starting column. Character

column or dot column is specified based on the

Scale command (page 83), or use the CP.DP

format (page 26).

STOP

Stop indicates the end of the REVERSE command;

enter STOP, and the IGP will wait for a new

command. If not entered, the IGP will expect

another set of Reverse Print command parameters.

Comments You can use reverse print with all form elements (alpha, lines,

boxes, etc.). The IGP can also reverse print bar codes, but

reverse printed bar codes are unreadable by scanning devices.

Scale

Purpose Defines the vertical line spacing and the horizontal pitch of the

form for data positioning specified by character row and column

or dot row and column.

Mode

CREATE

Format

SCALE; DOT [;horz;vert]

SCALE; CHAR [;lpi] [;cpi]

SCALE

DOT

The Scale command; enter SCALE.

Specifies the dot scale. Enter DOT.

horz/vert

Gives resolution for the dot parameter. Default is 60

dpi (horizontal) by 72 dpi (vertical).

CHAR

lpi

Specifies the character scale. Enter CHAR.

The optional vertical line spacing parameter (in

lines per inch) for character scaling. Enter 6, 8, 9, or

10. The default is 6 lpi.

cpi

The optional horizontal pitch parameter (in

characters per inch) for character scaling. Enter 10,

12, 13, 15, 17, or 20. The default is 10 cpi.

Comments If the character scale is selected, starting row/column or ending

row/column parameters are specified by character row and

column. The lines per inch (lpi) value for a character scale form

can be 6, 8, 9, or 10. Characters per inch (cpi) can be either 10,

12, 13, 15, 17, or 20. For example, on a printer with a maximum

print width of 80 columns, an 8-1/2 x 11-inch form at the 6 lpi 10

cpi default has 66 rows and 80 columns in the character scale.

(Refer to your printer User’s Guide to determine your maximum

print boundaries.)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

If the dot scale is selected, the parameters are specified in dot

row and column. For example, based on a 60 dpi horizontal and

72 dpi vertical dot scale, a form of 8-1/2 x 11 inches has 792 rows

(72 dpi x 11 inches) and 510 columns (60 dpi x 8-1/2 inches), and

a form of 8 x 11 inches has 792 rows and 480 columns.

The default scale factor uses character row and column (6 lpi and

10 cpi). Anytime CP.DP format (page 26) is used, the scale

assumes 6 lpi and 10 cpi and a 60 x 72 dpi format.

You can change the scale at any time during forms creation by

using either of the Scale commands. Elements designed before

the scale change will print at the former scale, while those

elements following the scale change will print at the current scale.

Note

For alphanumeric data, the Scale command only affects

data position. For graphic elements (such as lines and

boxes), the Scale command can also affect line thickness if

the horizontal/vertical scales are given.

Select Format

Purpose Enables the IGP to ignore all host-generated paper movement

commands (00-0F hex).

Mode

NORMAL, CREATE or EXECUTE

(cc)SFON or (cc)SFOFF

Format

Note

A line terminator is not required in the Select Format

Sequence.

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

The Select Format On command. Enter SFON.

Exits Select Format. Enter SFOFF.

SFON

SFOFF

Comments During Select Format, you may enter the following IGP paper

movement commands. All the commands must be entered in

UPPERCASE. These commands can only be used with the

Select Format command. If used at any other time, an error

condition may result.

Command Paper Movement Function

(cc)CR

(cc)LF

(cc)FF

Sends a carriage return (hex 0D)

Sends a line feed (hex 0A)

Sends a form feed (hex 0C)

Although the Select Format command enables the IGP to ignore

all host-generated paper movement commands, you can input

IGP paper movement commands with Select Format on.

SFON/SFOFF cannot be used during Ignore Sequence (page

71).

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Setup

Purpose Automatically executes and loads IGP/PGL commands such as

forms, logos, customized print environments, etc., from flash

memory to the printer whenever printer power is applied or when

the RESET command (page 82) is sent.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)SETUP

HOST DATA

(cc)SETUPEND

(cc)

The Special Function Control Code.

The Setup command; enter SETUP.

SETUP

HOST DATA Any IGP/PGL commands, form definitions, text, etc.

to be stored and executed at power-up.

SETUPEND Finishes storing host data and returns the printer to

the NORMAL mode. Enter SETUPEND.

Comments Because the RESET command causes the setup routine to be

executed, the RESET command can not be in the SETUP

information or else an infinite loop will occur.

If IGP/PGL commands have not been added between the SETUP

and SETUPEND commands, the SETUP.PTX file on the flash

memory is automatically deleted, and no IGP/PGL SETUP

commands are executed upon printer power-up.

Note

The SETUP.PTX is automatically created by the IGP/PGL

when the ~SETUPEND command is received. When the

SETUP.PTX file is not on the flash memory, no extra

IGP/PGL commands are performed on power up.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Command Codes

Special Function Control Code Change

Purpose Changes the current Special Function Control Code (SFCC).

Mode

NORMAL or EXECUTE

Format

(cc)SFCC; n

(cc)SFCC; ‘n’

(cc)

The current Special Function Control Code.

SFCC;

Specifies the Special Function Control Code

change command. Enter SFCC; (the semicolon is

required.)

Represents the ASCII decimal numeric value for

the new SFCC. Replace n with a decimal value

between 0 and 255.

‘n’

Represents the hexidecimal value for a printable

character as the new SFCC. Replace ‘n’ with a

hexidecimal value between 20 and 7F. If

representing the new SFCC in hexidecimal, it must

be enclosed in single quotes.

Comments When the SFCC is changed using the SFCC command, the

change is effective immediately and the old SFCC is no longer

recognized.

When printer power is turned off and on, the SFCC returns to the

configuration default. The configuration default SFCC can also be

re-selected by sending the command: (cc)SFCC;‘ ’

Example The following example, using both the ASCII and hexadecimal

values, changes the SFCC from the tilde (~) to the caret (^).

~SFCC;94 or ~SFCC;‘5E’

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bar Codes

Overview

A bar code is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters. Bar codes

are produced by entering bar code commands in the Create Form mode. The

IGP bar codes are listed in Table 7, with detailed bar code information

provided on the referenced pages. All parameters must be separated by a

semicolon (;) unless noted otherwise. Throughout this chapter, actual

commands required for input are shown exactly as they must be entered,

while all parameters associated with that command are shown in italics.

Optional parameters are enclosed in brackets. Spaces are used only to

visually separate the command parameters, but do not enter these spaces in

your command.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Overview

Table 7. Available Bar Codes

Symbol

Page

Bar Code

Mnemonic

Code Set

Length

Codabar

Code 39

Code 93

CODABAR

C3/9

Variable

Alphanumeric

Variable

CODE93

102

108

Code 128 -

A, B and C

C128A

C128B

C128C

Alphanumeric and

Control Codes

EAN8

EAN13

FIM

7 digits

12 digits

n/a

Numeric

A, B, C or D

Numeric

118

123

129

135

141

147

153

EAN13

FIM

German I-2/5

I25GERMAN 11 or 13 digits

Interleaved 2/5 I-2/5

Variable

ITF-14

Matrix

MSI

ITF14

13 digits

MATRIX

MSI

Variable

13 or 14 digits

Variable

PDF417

Alphanumeric and

Control Codes

PostBar

POSTBAR

POSTNET

Variable

Numeric

163

158

POSTNET

5, 9, or 11

digits

Royal Mail

Telepen

ROYALBAR

TELEPEN

Variable

Alphanumeric

Numeric

163

167

173

185

191

UCC/EAN-128 UCC-128

UPC-A

UPC-E

UPC-E and

UPC-E0

11 or 6

Numeric

UPCSHIP

UPS11

UPCSHIP

UPS11

13 digits

10 digits

Numeric

198

203

Alphanumeric

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User-Defined Variable Bar Code Ratios

The user-defined variable ratio for bar codes is an optional parameter. The

default ratios shown in Table 8 are overridden by the variable ratio feature.

Four- and eight-digit ratios can be used, depending upon the bar code

selected. Ratio data must be decimal values greater than 0. Enter R, followed

by the actual bar code ratio. A colon must separate each element of the ratio.

Like standard bar code ratios, user-defined ratios are also interpreted from left

to right, measuring the size of each bar or space, in dot width, in the following

pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide bar : wide space. Enter either four or

eight values depending upon the bar code type. See Table 8 for the number

of values needed.

If the D parameter is specified, the ratios are represented in printer dots

instead of IGP dots (60 x 72 dpi).

Note

The IGP does not verify that ratio data creates acceptable

wide/narrow element relationships for bar code readability.

When designing unique ratio data, carefully plot wide and

narrow ratios to conform to readable bar codes.

Variable Ratio Sample

~CREATE;TEST

SCALE;CHAR

ALPHA

2;5;1;1;*Std. Ratio*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;X1;H7;D;3;5

ACODE39A

PDF;B;N

STOP

ALPHA

2;30;1;1;*VAR. Ratio*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;XR2:2:5:5;H7;D;3;30

ACODE39A

PDF;B;N

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;TEST;1

~NORMAL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Overview

PDF Character Sizes [PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

UPC and EAN

For UPC and EAN bar codes, a smaller Letter Gothic font will be substituted

for OCR-A or OCR-B when the bar code symbol is not large enough to

accommodate a 10 CPI font.

Other Bar Codes

For all other bar codes, OCR-A and OCR-B will print at 10 CPI. If necessary,

when using the Normal font, the PDF will be automatically sized to fit the

length of the bar code symbol.

Table 8. IGP/PGL Bar Code Specification Summary

Average Narrow

Magnification

Parameter

Character

Density (cpi)

Description

Element Width

(mils)

Ratio

Codabar

16.7

5.4

4:3:2:1

Code 39

Telepen

X1A

X1B

16.7

37.5

54.2

70.8

3.75

4.6

4.2

1.9

1.3

1.1

3:1

2:1

2.5:1

2.3:1

2.5:1

2.4:1

Code 128A

Code 128B

Code 93

X1.5

16.7

25.0

33.0

50.0

66.7

5.4

4.1

2.7

1.8

1.4

4:3:2:1

UPS 11

Code 128C

UCC/EAN-128

X1.5

16.7

25.0

33.0

50.0

66.7

10.9

8.2

5.4

3.6

2.7

4:3:2:1

EAN 8 and 13

default

16.7

1.28 MAG

4:3:2:1

Interleaved 2/5

German I-2/5

ITF-14

Matrix

UPCSHIP

X1A

X1B

X2A

16.7

20.8

16.7

37.5

33.2

54.2

70.8

6.7

5.7

8.5

3.5

4.3

2.3

1.8

3:1

2.6:1

2:1

2.3:1

2:1

2.5:1

2.4:1

MSI-A

MSI-B

MSI-C

MSI-D

16.7

25.1

33.4

41.7

6.1

4.1

3.0

2.4

3:1

2.5:1

2.3:1

UPC-A and E

default

16.7

n/a

1.28 MAG

n/a

4:3:2:1

n/a

PostBar and Royal

Mail

X1A

POSTNET

Per U.S. Postal Service Publication 25: A Guide to Business Mail Preparation (USPS Certified)

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Codabar

Bar Codes

The rest of this chapter describes each of the bar codes available with the

IGP/PGL emulation.

Codabar

The Codabar structure is shown in Figure 7 and described on the following

pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 7. Codabar Structure

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each

bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code

scanning.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each wide or narrow bar or

space is one element; each character in the data field has nine elements. The

structure is three wide elements (bars or spaces) out of the nine total

elements which compose one character.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The optional modulo-43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify

accurate scanning.

Codabar Command Format

BARCODE

CODABAR [CD];[DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

CODABAR CD

Designates bar code type Codabar; enter

CODABAR. To calculate and plot the optional

modulo-43 check digit with the bar code symbol

automatically, enter CD.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Codabar

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter

a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density. You can also use XR or

XRD, defined on page 89.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 0.9 inch.

[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Note

If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be

included.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form Mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on

page 28 for more information.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

(D)

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is

not printed with the data.

data field

Contains the bar code characters. A null data field

(no characters) is permitted. The data field can

contain any of the characters listed in Table 9

except the SFCC. The length of the data field is

variable; however, the maximum length is usually

limited to 32 characters to minimize potential

reading errors.

PDF

LOC

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If the parameter is not used, the human

readable data will not print. This parameter is not

allowed if a null data field is specified.

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above bar code. To

compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the

height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Codabar

Table 9. Codabar Character Set

Character

Hex

Character

Hex

Codabar Example

~CREATE;TEST;288

SCALE;CHAR

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form mode)

(Bar code command)

CODABAR;VSCAN;X1;H7;5;20

*A2345B*

PDF;B;N

(Printable data field)

(Ends bar code command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;TEST

~NORMAL

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Code 39

The Code 39 structure is shown in Figure 8 and described on the following

pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 8. Code 39 Structure

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 39

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each

bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code

scanning.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each wide or narrow bar or

space is one element; each character in the data field has nine elements. The

structure is three wide elements (bars or spaces) out of the nine total

elements which compose one character.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The optional modulo-43 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify

accurate scanning.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Code 39 Command Format

Although commonly referred to as Code “39,” you must enter the command

as “C3/9” (including the slash) during IGP input.

BARCODE

C3/9 [CD]; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

C3/9 CD

Designates bar code type C39; enter C3/9. To

calculate and plot the optional mod-43 check digit

with the bar code symbol automatically, enter CD.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter

a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density. You can also use XR or

XRD, defined on page 89.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1- inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments plus

dots; enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to

select height adjustments from 0.3 to 9.9 inches.

The default value is 0.9 inch. The [.m] provides an

additional number of dots for the bar code height.

(Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Note

If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be

included.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 39

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes.

Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page 28

for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is

not printed with the data.

data field

Contains the bar code characters. A null data field

(no characters) is permitted. The data field can

contain any of the characters listed in Table 10.

The length of the data field is variable; however, the

maximum length is usually limited to 32 characters

to minimize potential reading errors.

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If the parameter is not used, the human

readable data will not print. This parameter is not

allowed if a null data field is specified.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above the bar code.

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

To compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data,

the height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X for OCR-B font; enter N for 10 cpi; enter P

for 12 cpi; enter Q for 13 cpi; enter R for 15 cpi;

enter T for 17 cpi; enter V for 20 cpi.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Table 10. Code 39 Character Set

ASCII

CODE 39

ASCII

CODE 39

ASCII

CODE 39

ASCII

CODE 39

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

’

Space

(

)

—

[

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

{

;

%T %X

%Y %Z

]

}

DEL

Note

Character pairs /M, /N, and /P through /Y are reserved for

future control character pairs.

100

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 39

Code 39 Example

Figure 9 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 39 bar code generated by

the following program:

~CREATE;C39

BARCODE

C3/9;DARK;40;15

*SAMPLE C3/9*

PDF

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;VSCAN;H14;DARK;27;58

(Enter Create Form mode)

(Bar Code Command)

(Dark Code 39 at SR 40, SC 15)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code Command)

(New Bar Code Command)

(Vert Dark Code 39, H 1.4, at SR 27, SC 58)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code Command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

*SAMPLE C3/9*

PDF

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;C39;1

SR 27

SC 58

SC 15

SR 40

Figure 9. Sample Code 39 Bar Codes

101

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Code 93

The Code 93 structure is shown in Figure 10 and described on the following

pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 10. Code 93 Structure

102

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 93

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent an extensive character set. The bars and spaces vary in width from

one to four modules. Each character consists of three bars and three spaces

that total 11 modules.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar

code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code is

included in the check digit algorithm.

103

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Code 93 Command Format

BARCODE

CODE93; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;][DARK;] SR;SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

CODE93

DIR

Designates bar code type Code 93; enter CODE93.

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. Increasing the magnification

adjusts printed character density as shown in Table

8. You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page

89. (You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable

ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 0.9 inch.

[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Note

If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be

included.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form Mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

104

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 93

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on

page 28 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it

will not print with the data.

data field

Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no

characters) is permitted. The length of the data field

is variable; however, the maximum length is usually

limited to 32 characters to minimize potential

reading errors. The data field can contain any of the

characters listed in Table 11, except the system

SFCC.

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If the parameter is not used, the human

readable data will not print. This parameter is not

allowed if a null data field was specified.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above bar code. To

compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the

height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

105

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Table 11. Code 93 Character Set

Character

Hex

Character

Hex

—

SPACE

Start

Stop

N/A

106

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 93

Code 93 Example

The illustration below shows a horizontal Code 93 bar code generated by the

following program:

~CREATE;TEST;288

SCALE;CHAR

BARCODE

(Enters Create Form mode)

(Bar code command)

CODE93;X1;H7;10;20

*ABCD5678*

PDF;B;N

(Printable data field)

(Ends bar code command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Prints form)

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;TEST

~NORMAL

SC 20

SR 10

107

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Code 128A, 128B and 128C

The Code 128 structure is shown in Figure 11 and described on the following

pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 11. Code 128 Structure

108

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128A, 128B and 128C

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code. Each

of the Code 128 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code,

both automatically provided by the IGP.

Code 128A Data Field

Although the command field does not allow the selection of Code A, the IGP

does encode these characters if found in the data.

Code 128B Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent an extensive character set (96 ASCII characters and seven control

characters). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four modules.

Each character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules.

Code 128C Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent 100 pairs of numeric digits (00 through 99) and 3 control

characters. The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 to 4 modules. Each

character consists of three bars and three spaces that total 11 modules.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar

code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code is

included in the check digit algorithm.

109

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Code 128 Command Format

BARCODE

C128A or C128B or C128C;[DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;]

[DARK;]SR;SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

C128A, C128B or C128C)

Designates bar code type; enter C128A, C128B or

C128C.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. Increasing the magnification

adjusts printed character density as shown in Table

8. You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page

89. (You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable

ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.3 to 9.9 inches. The default

value is 0.9 inch. The [.m] provides an additional

number of dots for the bar code height. (Dots are in

the current dot scale.)

Note

If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be

included.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

110

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128A, 128B and 128C

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1 to

512 to identify the bar code field. The SR and

SC parameters specify the exact location of

the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. Refer to the data field

description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes.

Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page 28

for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it

will not print with the data.

data field

Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no

characters) is permitted. Whenever a string of 4 or

more contiguous numeric digits are detected, the

IGP/PGL automatically inserts a Code C at the start

of the numeric string and outputs numeric digit

pairs packed into single bar code characters. When

the string is broken (non-numeric data or an

unpaired numeric digit occurs), the IGP/PGL

automatically inserts either a Code A or Code B

and returns to their respective symbols. The length

of the data field is variable; however, the maximum

length is usually limited to 32 characters to

minimize potential reading errors. The data field

can contain any of the characters listed in Table 12,

Table 13 and Table 14, beginning on page 113.

111

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

PDF

LOC

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If the parameter is not used, the human

readable data will not print. This parameter is not

allowed if a null data field was specified.

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above bar code. To

compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the

height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

112

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128A, 128B and 128C

Table 12. Code 128A Character Set

Character Hex

Character

Hex

NUL

SUB

ESC

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

;

BEL

[

’

(

]

)

DLE

DC1

FNC 3

23 See NOTE

22 See NOTE

28 See NOTE

27 See NOTE

24 See NOTE

DC2

DC3

DC4

FNC 2

SHIFT

CODE C

FUNC 4

NAK

SYN

CODE B

26 See NOTE

ETB

CAN

FNC 1

21 See NOTE

(N/A)

START A

STOP

(N/A)

Note

Access for the alternate set of control function characters is

by using SO (Shift Out, decimal 14, hex 0E). The SO control

code identifies the next character as the control function

character, which must be inserted before each alternate

character required.

The SO control code can be changed to any decimal value from 0 through

255 using the printer's front panel. See the “Configuration Menus” chapter in

your User’s Guide.

113

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Table 13. Code 128B Character Set

Character Hex Character Hex Character

Character Hex

Hex

[

;

’

{

(

)

]

‘

}

FNC 3

23 See NOTE

22 See NOTE

28 See NOTE

27 See NOTE

24 See NOTE

25 See NOTE

21 See NOTE

(N/A)

FNC 2

SHIFT

CODE C

FUNC 4

CODE A

FNC 1

START B

STOP

(N/A)

Note

Access for the alternate set of control function characters is

by using SO (Shift Out, decimal 14, hex 0E). The SO control

code identifies the next character as the control function

character, which must be inserted before each alternate

character required.

The SO control code can be changed to any decimal value from 0 through

255 using the printer's front panel. See the “Configuration Menus” chapter in

your User’s Guide.

114

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128A, 128B and 128C

Table 14. Code 128C Character Set

Character

Hex

Character

Hex

Character

Hex

Character

Hex

30 30

30 31

30 32

30 33

30 34

30 35

30 36

30 37

30 38

30 39

31 30

31 31

31 32

31 33

31 34

31 35

31 36

31 37

31 38

31 39

32 30

32 31

32 32

32 33

32 34

32 35

32 36

32 37

32 38

32 39

33 30

33 31

33 32

33 33

33 34

33 35

33 36

33 37

33 38

33 39

34 30

34 31

34 32

34 33

34 34

34 35

34 36

34 37

34 38

34 39

35 30

35 31

35 32

35 33

35 34

35 35

35 36

35 37

35 38

35 39

36 30

36 31

36 32

36 33

36 34

36 35

36 36

36 37

36 38

36 39

37 30

37 31

37 32

37 33

37 34

37 35

37 36

37 37

37 38

37 39

38 30

38 31

38 32

38 33

38 34

38 35

38 36

38 37

38 38

38 39

39 30

39 31

39 32

39 33

39 34

39 35

39 36

39 37

39 38

39 39

CODE B 26 See NOTE

CODE A 25 See NOTE

FNC 1

START C (N/A)

STOP (N/A)

21 See NOTE

Note

Access for the alternate set of control function characters is

by using SO (Shift Out, decimal 14, hex 0E). The SO control

code identifies the next character as the control function

character, and must be inserted before each alternate

character required.

The SO control code can be changed to any decimal value from 0 through

255 using the printer's front panel. See the “Configuration Menus” chapter in

your User’s Guide.

115

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Code 128B Example

Figure 12 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 128B bar code generated

by the following program:

~CREATE;128B

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form mode)

(Bar Code command)

C128B;DARK;40;15

(Dark Code 128B at SR 40, SC 15)

*SAMPLE CODE 128B* (Data Field)

PDF;A

STOP

BARCODE

(Upper Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

C128B;VSCAN;H12;DARK;31;55

(Vert. Dark C128B, H 1.2 at SR 31, SC 55)

*SAMPLE CODE 128B* (Data Field)

PDF

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminate Create Form mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;128B;1

SC 55

SR 31

SC 15

SR 40

Figure 12. Sample Code 128B Bar Codes

116

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Code 128A, 128B and 128C

Code 128C Example

Figure 13 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Code 128C bar code generated

by the following program:

~CREATE;128C

BARCODE

C128C;DARK;35;15

*1234567890*

PDF

STOP

BARCODE

C128C;VSCAN;H12;DARK;27;50

(Enter Create Form mode)

(Bar Code command)

(Dark Code 128C at SR 35,SC 15)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

(Vert. Dark C128C, H 1.2 at SR 27, SC 50)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

*1234567890*

PDF

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;128C;1

SC 50

SR 27

SC 15

SR 35

Figure 13. Sample Code 128C Bar Codes

117

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

EAN 8

The EAN 8 bar code structure is shown in Figure 14 and described on the

following pages.

SR, SC

POSITION

CENTER CODE

START CODE

STOP CODE

QUIET

ZONE

LEFT DATA

FIELD

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

HEIGHT

Normal

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

OPTIONAL READABLE

DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

INV

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

LEFT DATA

FIELD

START CODE

STOP CODE

CENTER CODE

2- or 5-

QUIET

ZONE

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

SR, SC

POSITION

START

CODE

CCW

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

STOP

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

CENTER

CODE

RIGHT

DATA

FIELD

RIGHT

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

CENTER

CODE

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

STOP

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

START

CODE

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

Figure 14. EAN 8 Structure

118

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 8

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from

overlapping. The IGP automatically produces the left quiet zone; you must

provide sufficient space on the form for the right quiet zone.

Start/Center/Stop Codes

The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those

portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start,

Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four

modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven

modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right

data field to permit read direction sensing.

The optional 2- or 5-digit add-on data, placed at the end of the bar code,

typically identifies a periodical issue number or price, respectively.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code

symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar

code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning.

119

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

EAN 8 Command Format

BARCODE

EAN8 [+n];[DIR;][SCB;][MAG;][Hn[.m];][BFn;][DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

EAN8

Designates bar code type EAN 8; enter EAN8.

Optional parameter to provide a 2- or 5-digit add-on

code at the end of the bar code data field. Enter a

plus sign (+) and a value of 2 or 5. The first bar of

the add-on code is separated by nine modules from

the last bar of the EAN symbol and a left guard

pattern. No center or right guard pattern exists.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

SCB

This option shortens the length of the center guard

bars, which are normally full length.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. Increasing the magnification

adjusts printed character density as shown in Table

8. You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page

89. (You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable

ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 4 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.4 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 1.3 inches. The [.m] provides an

additional number of dots for the bar code height.

(Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form. With this

parameter, the actual data for the bar code data

field is provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field:

a. Enter BF.

120

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 8

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. The length of the data field need not be

specified since it is fixed at seven digits, plus

any add-on data.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on

page 28 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is

not printed with the data.

data field

The characters of the bar code data are restricted

to exactly seven digits. If the 2- or 5-digit add-on

data option is used, include this data at the end of

the data field. The characters available for the data

field are 0 through 9 (30 through 39 hex,

respectively).

PDF

Optional parameter to print the human readable

data field. The data field prints automatically unless

the PDF-suppress command is specified in the

FONT parameter. The human readable data field

can be printed above or below the bar code

symbol. If no PDF command is entered, the data

field will print automatically in the default OCR-B

font.

121

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above the bar code.

To compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data,

the height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi. Enter S to suppress

printing the data field and the trailing lower portions

of the EAN bar code.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

EAN 8 Example

Figure 15 illustrates a horizontal and vertical EAN 8 bar code generated by

the following program:

~CREATE;EAN8

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form mode)

(Bar Code command)

EAN8+2;H9;DARK;33;15(Dark Code EAN 8, 2-digit add-on,

H 0.9, SR 33, SC 15)

*123456722*

PDF

(Data Field plus 2-digit add-on Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

BARCODE

EAN8+2;VSCAN;H10;DARK;33;55

(New Bar Code command)

(Vertical Dark EAN 8, 2-digit add-on,

H 1.0, SR 33, SC 55)

*123456722*

(Data Field plus 2-digit add-on Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

PDF

STOP

(Ends Bar Code command)

END

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

~EXECUTE;EAN8;1

SC 55

SC 15

SR 33

Figure 15. Sample EAN 8 Bar Codes

122

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 13

The EAN 13 bar code structure is shown in Figure 16 and described on the

following pages.

SR, SC

POSITION

CENTER CODE

START CODE

STOP CODE

QUIET

ZONE

LEFT DATA

FIELD

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

Normal

HEIGHT

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

OPTIONAL READABLE

DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

INV

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

LEFT DATA

FIELD

START CODE

STOP CODE

CENTER CODE

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

START

CODE

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

STOP

CODE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

CENTER

CODE

RIGHT

DATA

FIELD

CCW

RIGHT

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CENTER

CODE

READABLE

DATA

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

STOP

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

START

CODE

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

HEIGHT

Figure 16. EAN 13 Structure

123

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. The IGP automatically produces an 11-module wide

left quiet zone; you are responsible for providing sufficient space (minimum of

seven modules) on the form for the right quiet zone. The number system

character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone.

Start/Center/Stop Codes

The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those

portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Number System Character

The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or

type of item. The first character in the data field is used as the number system

character.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start,

Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one to four

modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven

modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right

data field to permit read direction sensing.

The optional 2- or 5-digit add-on data field is placed at the end of the bar code

data and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price, respectively.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code

symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar

code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number system

character is included in the check digit algorithm.

124

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 13

EAN 13 Command Format

BARCODE

EAN13 [+n];[DIR;][SCB;][MAG;][Hn[.m];][BFn;][DARK;]SR;SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

EAN13

Designates bar code type EAN 13; enter EAN13.

Optional parameter to provide a 2- or 5-digit add-on

code at the end of the bar code data field. Enter a

plus sign (+) and a value of 2 or 5. The first bar of

the add-on code is separated by nine modules from

the last bar of the EAN symbol and a left guard

pattern. No center or right guard pattern exists.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

SCB

This option shortens the length of the center guard

bars, which are normally full length.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. Increasing the magnification

adjusts printed character density as shown in Table

8. You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page

89. (You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable

ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 4 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.4 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 1.3 inches. The [.m] provides an

additional number of dots for the bar code height.

(Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form. With this

parameter, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

125

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. The length of the data field need not be

specified, since it is fixed at 12 digits, plus any

add-on data.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes.

Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page 28

for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is

not printed with the data.

data field

Enter the characters of the bar code data, restricted

to exactly 12 digits. If the 2- or 5-digit add-on data

option is used, include this data at the end of the

data field. The characters available for the data

field are 0 through 9 (30 through 39 hex,

respectively). The first character is interpreted as

the number system character.

The left side of the data field (or the lower side on

vertically-oriented symbols) can be encoded in

either format A or format B as determined by the

value of the number system character. (A bar code

character is not produced for the number system

character.) The number system character is

derived from the left side data field encoding. The

right side of the data field (or the upper side on

vertically-oriented symbols) and check digit are

126

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EAN 13

always encoded in format C. Table 15 defines the

left side data field format based on the number

system character.

PDF

Optional parameter which affects printing of the

human readable data field. The data field will print

automatically in the default OCR-B font unless the

PDF-suppress command is specified in the FONT

parameter. The human readable data field can be

printed above or below the bar code symbol.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above the bar code.

To compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data,

the height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi. Enter S to suppress

printing the data field and the trailing lower portions

of the EAN bar code.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Table 15. Left Side Data Field Format

Format for Left Side Data Field Positions

Number System

Character Value

127

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

EAN 13 Example

Figure 17 illustrates a horizontal and vertical EAN 13 bar code generated by

the following program:

~CREATE;EAN13

BARCODE

EAN13+5;D;28;15

*12345678987655555*

PDF

STOP

BARCODE

EAN13+5;VSCAN;H12;D;27;49

*12345678987655555*

PDF

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;EAN13;1

~NORMAL

SC 49

SC 15

SR 27

SR 28

Figure 17. Sample EAN 13 Bar Codes

128

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FIM

The FIM (Facing Identification Mark) bar code structure is shown in Figure 18

and Figure 19 and described on the following pages. The left boundary must

begin 3 inches from the right edge of the mail piece. The right-most bar must

be 2 inches ± 1/8-inch from the right edge of the mail piece. Bars must be 5/8-

inch ± 1/8-inch tall; the top of the bars must be no lower than 1/8-inch from

the top edge of the mail piece (and may touch the top edge of the mail piece).

The bar code baseline must be within 1/8-inch from the bottom edge of the

clear zone.

SR, SC

POSITION

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

2"- 1-7/8"

1-3/4"

1-1/4"

1/8"

Return Address Area

5/8"

Clear

Zone

(Optional Line) NON-ADDRESS DATA

(Top Line) NAME OF RECIPIENT

(Optional Line) INFORMATION/ATTENTION LINE

(Line Above Last) DELIVERY ADDRESS

(Last Line) POST OFFICE STATE ZIP

Figure 18. FIM Structure

129

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

1-3/4"

SR, SC

POSITION

1/8" Clear

Zone

1-1/4"

5/8"

)

Line)

(

(LineA

sca

stra

Figure 19. FIM Structure (VSCAN or CCW)

Note

Additional information regarding FIM bar code requirements

can be obtained from the U.S. Postal Service’s Publication

25: A Guide to Business Mail Preparation.

130

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FIM

Clear Zone

The bar code structure requires a completely blank, 1/4-inch wide, 5/8-inch

tall clear zone, reserved for only the appropriate FIM pattern. You must

provide sufficient space for this zone.

Start/Stop Code

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each

bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code

scanning.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a nine-position bar/no-bar pattern of tall (full) bars

of uniform height. Minimum height must be 5/8-inch ± 1/8-inch. (Bar height

may be longer to wrap around the top of the envelope.) Minimum bar width is

.031-inch ± .008-inch. Spacing (pitch) between each bar/no-bar must be 1/16-

inch. Bar tilt (slant) can vary ± 5 degrees (relative to a line perpendicular to

the top edge of the envelope).

FIM Command Format

BARCODE

FIM; [DIR;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

FIM

Designates bar code type FIM; enter FIM.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 6 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.6 to 9.9 inches. The default

value is 0.6 inches.

[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form. With this

parameter, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form Mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

131

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn

parameters are used. Refer to the data field

description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on

page 28 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value 1/8-inch from the top edge of the mail piece.

Character row or dot row is specified based on the

Scale command (page 83), or use the CP.DP

format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is

not printed with the data.

data field

A single-character data field to designate one of

four available FIM patterns: A, B, C, or D. Based on

your application (check with your Postal Service for

more information), enter one of the following FIM

types:

A Used only on courtesy reply envelopes bearing a

preprinted POSTNET bar code (page 158); it

requires a luminescent stamp or meter mark to be

accepted in the facer/canceler.

B Used on Business Reply Mail, Penalty Mail, and

Franked Mail without a preprinted POSTNET bar

code, and does not require luminescent indicia.

C Used on Business Reply Mail, Penalty Mail, or

Franked Mail bearing a preprinted POSTNET bar

code (page 158).

132

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

FIM

D Used on OCR readable mail (usually courtesy

reply window envelopes) without a preprinted

POSTNET bar code.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

FIM Example

Figure 20 below illustrates a horizontal FIMB bar code generated by the

following program without the POSTNET preprinted bar code (POSTNET is

discussed on page 158.)

~CREATE;FIMB

ALPHA

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Alpha command)

23;11;0;0;*PRINTRONIX, INC.*

25;11;0;0;*ATTN: CUSTOMER SERVICE*

27;11;0;0;*P.O. BOX 19559*

29;11;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714-9559*

STOP

(Ends Alpha command)

BARCODE

(Bar Code command)

FIM;DARK;15;22

(Dark FIM Bar Code at SR 15, SC 22)

(Data field selecting FIMB Bar Code)

(Ends FIMB Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Executes the form, form count of 1)

*B*

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;FIMB;1

SR 15

SC 22

FIMC.EX

Figure 20. Sample FIMB Bar Code

133

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Figure 21 illustrates a horizontal FIMC bar code generated by the following

program and bears the preprinted POSTNET bar code.

~CREATE;FIMC

ALPHA

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Alpha command)

23;11;0;0;*PRINTRONIX, INC.*

25;11;0;0;*ATTN: CUSTOMER SERVICE*

27;11;0;0;*P.O. BOX 19559*

29;11;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714-9559*

STOP

(Ends Alpha command)

BARCODE

FIM;DARK;17;25

*C*

(Bar Code command)

(Dark FIM Bar Code at SR 17, SC 25)

(Data field selecting FIMC Bar Code)

(Ends Bar Code command)

STOP

BARCODE

(New Bar Code command)

POSTNET;DARK;33.3;15 (Dark POSTNET Bar Code at SR 33.3, SC 15)

*927149559*

STOP

(POSTNET data field)

(Ends POSTNET Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Executes the form, form count of 1)

END

~EXECUTE;FIMC;1

SR 17

SC 25

SC 15

SR 33.3

FIMB.EX

Figure 21. Sample FIMC Bar Code

134

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5 and ITF-14

The Interleaved 2/5, German I-2/5 and ITF-14 bar code structure is shown in

Figure 22 and described on the following pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 22. Interleaved 2/5, German I-2/5 and ITF-14 Structure

135

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from

overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop

codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or

spaces) and 3 narrow elements. In the bar code, two characters are

interleaved (paired); bars are used to represent the first character in the pair

and spaces are used to represent the second character in the pair.

German I-2/5 and ITF-14 are special cases of Interleaved 2/5 bar codes.

While Interleaved 2/5 has a variable data field, German I-2/5 is restricted to 11

or 13 digits, and ITF-14 is restricted to 13 digits.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate

scanning.

Interleaved 2/5 can be printed with or without a check digit, but German I-2/5

and ITF-14 have the check digit automatically included.

136

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5 and ITF-14

I-2/5 Command Format

BARCODE

I-2/5 [CD]; or

I25GERMAN; or

ITF14; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

I-2/5 CD

Designates bar code type Interleaved 2/5; enter

I-2/5. To calculate and plot the optional modulo-10

check digit with the bar code symbol automatically,

enter CD.

I25GERMAN Designates German Interleaved 2/5; enter

I25GERMAN. The mod-10 check digit is

automatically included.

ITF14

Designates ITF-14; enter ITF14. The mod-10 check

digit is automatically included.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter

a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density. You can also use XR or

XRD as defined on page 89.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 0.9-inch. The [.m] provides an

additional number of dots for the bar code height.

(Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Note

If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be

included.

137

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes.

Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page 28

for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it

will not print with the data.

138

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Interleaved 2/5 (I-2/5), German I-2/5 and ITF-14

data field

Interleaved 2/5: Enter the characters for the bar

code data. A null data field (no characters) is

permitted. The length of the data field is variable;

however, the maximum length is usually limited to

32 characters to minimize potential reading errors.

An even number of characters are required for the

interleaving process. Consequently, if an odd

number of characters are entered in the data field,

a leading zero is added automatically. The

characters available for the data field are 0 through

9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).

German I-2/5: The data field must be 11 or 13

digits exactly.

ITF-14: The data field must be 13 digits exactly.

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If the parameter is not used, the human

readable data is not printed. This parameter is not

allowed if a null data field was specified. For

German I-2/5, fields of the data are separated by

dots and spaces.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above the bar code.

To compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data,

the height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1-inch.

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

139

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

I-2/5 Example

Figure 23 illustrates a horizontal and vertical I-2/5 bar code generated by the

following program:

~CREATE;I25

BARCODE

I-2/5;DARK;49;27

*24688642*

PDF;A

STOP

BARCODE

I-2/5;VSCAN;H12;DARK;44;52

(Enter Create Form mode)

(Bar Code command)

(Dark Code I-2/5, at SR 49, SC 27)

(Data Field)

(Upper Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

(Vert. Dark I-2/5, H 1.2 at SR 44, SC 52)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

*24688642*

PDF

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;I25;1

SC 52

SR 44

SC 27

SR 49

Figure 23. Sample I-2/5 Bar Codes

140

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Matrix

The structure for the Matrix bar code is shown in Figure 24 and described on

the following pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 24. Matrix Structure

141

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from

overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes

Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop

codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or

spaces) and 3 narrow elements. In the bar code, each character encoded is

separated by a narrow space.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit can be inserted into the bar code to verify accurate

scanning.

142

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Matrix

Matrix Command Format

BARCODE

MATRIX [CD]; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

MATRIX CD Designates bar code type Matrix; enter MATRIX.

To calculate and plot the optional modulo-10 check

digit with the bar code symbol automatically, enter

CD.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter

a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density. You can also use XR or

XRD, defined on page 89.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 0.9-inch.

[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Note

If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be

included.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form Mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

143

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on

page 28 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it

will not print with the data.

data field

Enter the characters for the bar code data. A null

data field (no characters) is permitted. The length of

the data field is variable; however, the maximum

length is usually limited to 32 characters to

minimize potential reading errors. An even number

of characters are required for the interleaving

process. Consequently, if an odd number of

characters are entered in the data field, a leading

zero is added automatically. The characters

available for the data field are 0 through 9 (30

through 39 hex, respectively).

144

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Matrix

PDF

LOC

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If the parameter is not used, the human

readable data is not printed. This parameter is not

allowed if a null data field was specified.

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above bar code. To

compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the

height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1-inch.

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

145

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Matrix Example

Figure 25 illustrates a horizontal and vertical Matrix bar code generated by the

following program:

~CREATE;MATRIX

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

BARCODE

MATRIX;DARK;27;49

(Dark Code Matrix, at SR 27, SC 49)

(Data Field)

*24688642*

PDF

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

STOP

BARCODE

MATRIX;VSCAN;H12;DARK;52;54

(Vertical Dark Matrix, H 1.2

at SR 52, SC 54)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

*24688642*

PDF

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;MATRIX;1

SC 49

SR 27

SC 54

SR 52

Figure 25. Sample Matrix Bar Codes

146

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MSI

The MSI bar code structure is shown in Figure 26 and described on the

following pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 26. MSI Structure

147

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25-inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Code

Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop

codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent each numeric character. The structure is four wide elements (bars

or spaces) and four narrow elements. Each character contains four data bits,

with each 0-bit made up of a narrow bar/wide space arrangement and each 1-

bit made up of a wide bar/narrow space arrangement.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

If specified, the modulo-10 or modulo-11 (or both) check digit is automatically

calculated and inserted in the bar code symbol. The check digit verifies

accurate scanning.

148

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MSI

MSI Command Format

BARCODE

MSI n; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

MSI

Designates bar code type MSI; enter MSI.

Designates the type of check digit combinations for

the bar code. Replace n with one of the following

codes to specify the check digit.

A single-digit modulo-10 followed by a second

modulo-10 digit

B single-digit modulo-11 followed by a single

modulo-10 digit

C single-digit modulo-10

D single-digit modulo-11

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter

a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density. You can also use XR or

XRD as defined on page 89.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 0.9-inch. The [.m] provides an

additional number of dots for the bar code height.

(Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Note

If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be

included.

149

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on

page 28 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it

will not print with the data.

150

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

MSI

data field

Enter the characters for the bar code data. A null

data field (no characters) is permitted. The length of

the data field is variable; however, a maximum of

14 data characters are allowed if a one-character

check digit field is specified; a maximum of 13 data

characters are allowed if a two-character check

digit field is specified. The characters available for

the data field are 0 through 9 (30 through 39 hex,

respectively).

PDF

LOC

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If the parameter is not used, the human

readable data will not print.

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above the bar code.

To compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data,

the height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1-inch.

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

151

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

MSI Example

Figure 27 illustrates a horizontal and vertical MSI bar code generated by the

following program:

~CREATE;MSI

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form mode)

(Bar Code command)

MSIA;DARK;32;27

*24688642*

PDF;X

(Dark Bar Code MSIA at SR 32, SC 27)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field, OCR-B)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

STOP

BARCODE

MSIB;VSCAN;X2;H12;DARK;32;54

(Vert. Dark MSIB, Mag 2, H 1.2 at

SR3 2, SC 54)

*24688642*

PDF;A

(Data Field)

(Upper Data Field)

STOP

END

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

~EXECUTE;MSI;1

SC 54

SC 27

SR 32

Figure 27. Sample MSI Bar Codes

152

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PDF417

The PDF417 structure is shown in Figure 28 and described on the following

pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

POSITION

QUIET START

ZONE

STOP

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

CODE

Normal

LOWER GUARD BAND

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

Figure 28. PDF417 Structure

153

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code.

Data Field

PDF417 provides twelve modes to encode data. The first three are pre-

established (the remaining nine are user modes, which can be defined by

users or industry associations according to specific applications):

1. Extended Alphanumeric Compaction mode (EXC). Comprised of four

sub-modes, this mode offers encodation of all printable ASCII characters.

This is the default mode; the PGL uses shift or latch characters to enable

other modes.

2. Binary/ASCII Plus mode. This offers encodation for all ASCII characters,

printable or not, and binary values.

3. Numeric Compaction mode. This offers encodation for numeric values to

a density of almost 3 digits per code word.

4. The PGL will automatically switch between modes to provide the smallest

encodation for the data.

Security Level

PDF417 can detect and correct errors. Each label has 2 code words of error

detection. You can select the error correction capacity based on application

needs. Specify a security level in the range of 0 - 8, at the time of printing.

PDF417 can also recover from omissions and misdecodes of code words.

Since it requires two code words to recover from a misdecode, one to detect

the error and one to correct for it, a given security level can support half the

number of misdecodes that it can of undecoded words.

PDF

Print Data Field is not offered due to the large amount of data that can be

encoded.

154

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PDF417

PDF417 Command Format

BARCODE

PDF417; [DIR;] [X[D]n;] [Y[D]n;] [(Hn)| (Wn);] [ASPECTh:w;]

[(Rn)|(Cn);] [Sn;] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

PDF417

DIR

Designates bar code type PDF417; enter PDF417.

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

X[D]n

Y[D]n

Optional parameter to designate the width of the

narrow element in either the default 60 X 72 dots

per inch or, if the D is given, in target dots. The

default size is 1/60th of an inch.

Optional parameter to designate the height of the

bar code in either the default 60 X 72 dots per inch

or, if the D is given, in target dots. The default size

is 2/72nd of an inch.

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height of

the bar code symbol (including human readable

data). Height adjustments are made in 0.1-inch

increments; enter H and a value from 4 through 99

to select height adjustments from 0.4 through 9.9

inches. Parameters Wn, Rn, Cn or ASPECT cannot

be entered if this parameter is used.

Optional parameter for the maximum width of the

symbol based on the narrow element width. Enter

Wn; where n is the overall width in tenths of an

inch. Parameters Hn, Rn, Cn or ASPECT cannot be

entered if this parameter is used.

ASPECT;h:w Optional parameter for specifying the symbol

height-to-width ratio where h is the height and w is

the width, both expressed as integers. The default

is 1:2. Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn, or Cn cannot be

entered if this parameter is used.

Optional parameter that specifies the number of

rows the symbol will have. Enter R followed by the

number of rows in the range of 3 through 90 in

multiples of 3. Parameters Hn, Wn, Cn or ASPECT

cannot be entered if this parameter is used.

Optional parameter that specifies the number of

columns the symbol will have. Enter C followed by

the number of columns in the range of 1 through

90. Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn or ASPECT cannot be

entered if this parameter is used.

155

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Optional parameter that specifies the security level.

Enter S followed by the security level in the range

of 0 through 8. The default is 2.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes.

Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page 28

for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it

will not print with the data.

156

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PDF417

data field

Enter the data for the bar code. A null data field (no

characters) is not permitted. The data field can

contain any character including carriage returns

and line feeds. The length of the data field is

variable; however, the maximum length is usually

limited to 1024 bytes to minimize potential reading

errors.

Note

New lines (i.e. carriage returns/line feeds) are allowed in the

PDF417 data field and as PDF417 dynamic data field input.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

PDF417 Example

Figure 29 illustrates a horizontal PDF417 bar code generated by the following

program:

~CREATE;PDF417

BARCODE

PDF417;X1;Y3;SO;D;37;21;

*ACME MOTOR COMPANY SUPPORTS PRINTING OF PDF417 TWO-DIMENSIONAL

BAR CODE SYMBOLOGY 123456789012345678901234567890123456789*

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;PDF417

~NORMAL

Figure 29. Sample PDF417 Bar Codes

157

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

POSTNET

The POSTNET bar code structure is illustrated in Figure 30 and Figure 31 and

described on the following pages. The POSTNET code can be a part of the

address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4-inch area across the

length of the mail piece.

Return Address Area

Postage Area

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA

1/2"

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

BAR CODE DATA FIELD

QUIET ZONE

CHECK DIGIT

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

Figure 30. POSTNET Structure

Additional information regarding POSTNET bar code

Note

requirements can be obtained from the U.S. Postal Service’s

Publication 25: A Guide to Business Mail Preparation.

158

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POSTNET

1/2"

QUIET

ZONE

STOP

CODE

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

BAR

CODE

DATA

FIELD

START

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

1/2"

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

Figure 31. POSTNET Structure (VSCAN or CCW)

159

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which extends

4.75 inches from the right edge of the mail piece. In addition, a minimum quiet

zone of 0.040-inch above and below the bar code data must also be provided.

You must provide sufficient space for this zone.

Start/Stop Code

The start and stop codes are referred to as “framing bars” in POSTNET. The

start and stop codes are each one tall bar, one identifying the leading and

trailing end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced

with each bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bar code scanning

in a left-to right direction only.

Data Field

The bar code data produces a single field of 30 bars for a 5-digit data field, 50

bars for a 9-digit data field, or 60 bars for an 11-digit data field. The bars are

grouped in sets of five. Each set of five bars (comprised of two tall bars and

three short bars) represents one of the five digits of the zip code, plus the

four-digit zip code extension. If the Advanced Bar Code is used, an additional

two-digit code is also added to make an 11-digit data field.

Each bar width is equal, and must be .020-inch ± .005-inch. Each bar height is

either a tall (full) or short (half) bar, representing a 1 or 0, respectively. Each

tall bar must be .125-inch ± .010-inch; each short bar must be .050-inch ±

.010-inch. Horizontal spacing between bars (pitch) must be 22 bars ± 2 bars

per inch over any 0.50-inch portion of the bar code. Horizontal spacing at 24

and 20 bars per inch is 0.0416-inch and .050-inch, respectively, with a clear

vertical space ranging from 0.012-inch to 0.040-inch between bars.

Check Digit

The sixth, tenth or twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character

for the 5, 9 or 11-digit data field, respectively. The check digit is added

automatically to verify accurate scanning.

160

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

POSTNET

POSTNET Command Format

BARCODE

POSTNET; [DIR;] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

POSTNET Designates bar code type POSTNET; enter

POSTNET.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. The data

field must be numeric and contain exactly 5, 9

or 11 digits.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes.

Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page 28

for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value in the range of the 4-inch vertical address

block. Character row or dot row is specified based

on the Scale command (page 83), or use the

CP.DP format (page 26).

161

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value within the 1/2-inch left and right margins of

the mail piece. Character column or dot column is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/) the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field but it will

not print with the data.

data field

STOP

The bar code data. Enter 5 digits (for zip code), 9

digits (for a nine-digit zip code), or 11 digits (for the

Advanced Bar Code format). The available

characters for the data field are 0 through 9 (30

through 39 hex, respectively).

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message will result.

POSTNET Example

Figure 32 illustrates a horizontal POSTNET bar code generated by the

following program:

~CREATE;POSTNET

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form mode)

(Bar Code command)

POSTNET;DARK;10;40 (Dark POSTNET bar code at SR 10, SC 40)

*601159912*

STOP

(ZIP+4 data field 60115-9912)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

END

~EXECUTE;POSTNET;1 (Execute the form, with a form count of 1)

SR 10

SC 40

Figure 32. Sample POSTNET Bar Code

162

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX)

PostBar and Royal Mail bar codes, like POSTNET, are used for mailing

applications. However, these bar codes can encode full addresses on labels.

These bar codes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width, but

have four different types of bars (Full Height, Ascender, Descender, and

Tracker), whereas POSTNET only has two bar types (Tall and Short).

The Royal Mail symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns of

four bars, using combinations of Full Height, Ascender, Descender, and

Trackers. It also adds start and stop bar codes as well as a check digit, except

with the KIX format (see below).

PostBar allows you complete flexibility to specify the individual bar types that

comprise the signal. For PostBar, you are responsible for encoding the

address, adding the start and stop codes, and supplying the appropriate

check digit.

Quiet Zone

The bar code structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which is a 2mm

border on each side of the bar code.

Start/Stop Code

The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the bar code.

Data Field

For PostBar, a variable length data field of digits “0” through “3” are allowed to

represent the bars: Full Height (0), Ascender (1), Descender (2), and Tracker

(3). For Royal Mail, the data is restricted to alphanumeric characters “A”

through “Z” and “0” through “9”. If using the KIX format for Royal Mail,

lowercase characters “a” through “z” are also valid.

Each bar width is equal, and must be .020-inch ± .005-inch. Horizontal

spacing between bars (pitch) must be 22 bars ± 2 bars per inch over any

0.50-inch portion of the bar code. The height of the bars (Full Height) has a

maximum of 0.230 inches and a minimum of 0.165 inches.

Check Digit

For PostBar, you are responsible for encoding and check digit. For Royal

Mail, a modulo-6 check digit is inserted at the end of the data field.

KIX Format

The KIX format for Royal Mail does not include the start/stop code or the

check digit.

163

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

PostBar and Royal Mail Command Format

BARCODE

POSTBAR or ROYALBAR; [KIX;][MAG;][BFn;L;][DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

POSTBAR or ROYALBAR

Designates bar code type PostBar or Royal Mail;

enter POSTBAR or ROYALBAR.

KIX

Optional parameter to specify the KIX format for

Royal Mail bar codes only; enter KIX.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter

a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density. X1A uses shorter bars to

reach the minimum height specification that allows

it to fit on a 6 LPI line.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. The data

field must be numeric and contain exactly 5, 9

or 11 digits.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on

page 28 for more information.

164

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

PostBar and Royal Mail (KIX)

(D)

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Character

row or dot row is specified based on the Scale

command (page 83), or use the CP.DP format

(page 26).

Defines the starting column of the bar code.

Character column or dot column is specified based

on the Scale command (page 83), or use the

CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/) the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field but it will

not print with the data.

data field

STOP

The bar code data. For PostBar, enter values 0

through 3 to represent the four different types of

bars. For Royal Mail, enter alphanumeric data (A

through Z and 0 through 9). If using the KIX format

for Royal Mail, lowercase characters a through z

are also valid.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message will result.

165

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

PostBar and Royal Mail Examples

Figure 33 illustrates a horizontal Royal Mail bar code generated by the

following program:

~CREATE;ROYALBAR

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

ROYALBAR;X1A;10;40 (Royal Mail bar code at SR 10,

SC 40 with Mag 1A)

*SN34RD1A*

STOP

(Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

END

~EXECUTE;ROYALBAR;1 (Execute the form, with a form count of 1)

SC 40

SR 10

Figure 33. Sample Royal Mail bar code (X1A Magnification)

Figure 34 illustrates a horizontal PostBar bar code generated by the following

program:

~CREATE;POSTBAR

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

POSTBAR;10;40

(PostBar bar code at SR 10, SC

40 with default Mag 1)

*10303023123102301031230123210212112210*

(Data Field)

STOP

END

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

~EXECUTE;POSTBAR;1 (Execute the form, with a form count of 1)

SC 40

SR 10

Figure 34. Sample PostBar bar code (X1 Magnification)

166

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Telepen

The Telepen structure is shown in Figure 35 and described on the following

pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 35. Telepen Structure

167

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing

end of the bar code. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each

bar code. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional bar code

scanning.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each character is represented

by a different series of bars and spaces, both wide and narrow, but is always

16 units in width (for a wide to narrow ratio of 3). Each character starts with a

bar and ends with a space.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

A mandatory modulo-127 check digit is inserted into the bar code to verify

accurate scanning.

168

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Telepen

Telepen Command Format

BARCODE

TELEPEN; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

(D) [data field] (D)

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

TELEPEN

Designates bar code type Telepen; enter

TELEPEN.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter

a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density. You can also use XR or

XRD as defined on page 89.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments plus

dots; enter H and a value from 3 through 99 to

select height adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9

inches. The default value is 0.9 inch. [.m] is an

additional number of dots for the bar code height.

(Dots are in the current dot scale.)

NOTE: If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be included.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form Mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

169

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on

page 28 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 89),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

89), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it is

not printed with the data.

data field

Contains the bar code characters. A null data field

(no characters) is permitted. The data field can

contain any of the characters listed in Table 10

except the SFCC. The length of the data field is

variable; however, the maximum length is usually

limited to 32 characters to minimize potential

reading errors.

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If the parameter is not used, the human

readable data will not print. This parameter is not

allowed if a null data field is specified.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above bar code. To

compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the

height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

170

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Telepen

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Table 16. Telepen Character Set

ASCII

Telepen

ASCII

Telepen

ASCII

Telepen

ASCII

Telepen

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

’

Space

(

)

—

[

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

{

;

%T %X

%Y %Z

]

}

DEL

NOTE: Character pairs /M, /N, and /P through /Y are reserved for future

control character pairs.

171

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Telepen Example

Figure 36 illustrates a vertical Telepen bar code generated by the following

program:

~CREATE;TELEPEN

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code Command)

TELEPEN;VSCAN;10;5

"AB12&%*"

PDF;B

(Vertical Telepen barcode at SR 10, SC 5)

(Data Field)

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code Command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

(Execute the form, form count of 1)

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;TELEPEN;1

SC 5

SR 10

Figure 36. Sample Telepen Bar Code

172

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UCC/EAN-128

The UCC/EAN-128 structure is shown in Figure 37 and described on the

following pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 37. UCC/EAN-128 Structure

173

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

UCC/EAN-128 uses the same bar code and character set as Code 128.

However, in UCC/EAN-128, the Function 1 character FNC1 immediately

follows the start code. The FNC1 character has been reserved exclusively for

UCC/EAN-128.

The UCC/EAN-128 data structure requires an Application Identifier (AI) at the

beginning of bar code data. Each AI determines the format and length of the

data which follows. Refer to Table 17 for more detail.

Table 17. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers

Application

Identifier (AI)

Content

Format

Serial Shipping Container Code

n2+n18

n2+n14

n2+an..20

n2+n6

Item Num. of Goods Within Another Unit

Batch or Lot Number

11 (*)

Production Date (YYMMDD)

13 (*)

Packaging Date (YYMMDD)

n2+n6

15 (*)

Sell By Date (Quality) (YYMMDD)

Expiration Date (Safety) (YYMMDD)

Product Variant

n2+n6

17 (*)

n2+n6

n2+n2

Serial Number

n2+an..20

n2+an..29

n3+n..19

n3+an..30

n2+n..8

n4+n6

HIBCC = Quantity, Date, Batch and Link

Lot Number (Transitional Use)

Additional Product ID Assigned By Manufacturer

Secondary Serial Number

23 (**)

240

250

Quantity

310 (***)

311 (***)

312 (***)

313 (***)

314 (***)

315 (***)

316 (***)

320 (***)

321 (***)

322 (***)

323 (***)

324 (***)

325 (***)

326 (***)

327 (***)

328 (***)

Net Weight, Kilograms

Length or 1st Dimension, Meters

Width, Diameter or 2nd Dimension, Meters

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters

Area, Square Meters

n4+n6

Volume, Liters

n4+n6

Volume, Cubic Meters

n4+n6

Net Weight, Pounds

n4+n6

Length Or 1st Dimension, Inches

Length Or 1st Dimension, Feet

Length Or 1st Dimension, Yards

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards

Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Inches

Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Feet

n4+n6

174

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UCC/EAN-128

Table 17. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)

Application

Identifier (AI)

Content

Format

n4+n6

329 (***)

330 (***)

331 (***)

332(***)

333 (***)

334 (***)

335 (***)

336 (***)

337 (***)

340 (***)

341 (***)

342 (***)

343 (***)

344 (***)

345 (***)

346 (***)

347 (***)

348 (***)

349 (***)

350 (***)

351 (***)

352 (***)

353 (***)

354 (***)

355 (***)

356 (***)

357 (***)

360 (***)

361 (***)

362 (***)

363 (***)

364 (***)

365 (***)

366 (***)

367 (***)

368 (***)

Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Yards

Gross Weight-Kilograms

n4+n6

n4+6

Length or 1st Dimension, Logistics

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Meters, Logistics

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters, Logistics

Area, Square Meters, Logistics

Gross Volume, Liters

n4+n6

Gross Volume, Cubic Meters

Kilograms Per Square Meter

Gross Weight, Pounds

Length Or 1st Dimension, Inches, Logistics

Length Or 1st Dimension, Feet, Logistics

Length Or 1st Dimension, Yards, Logistics

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches, Logistics

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet, Logistics

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards, Logistics

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Inches, Logistics

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Feet, Logistics

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Yards, Logistics

Area, Square Inches

Area, Square Feet

Area, Square Yards

Area, Square Inches, Logistics

Area, Square Feet, Logistics

Area, Square Yards, Logistics

Net Weight, Troy Ounce

Net Volume, Ounces

Volume, Quarts

Volume, Gallons

Gross Volume, Quarts

Gross Volume, Gallons

Volume, Cubic Inches

Volume, Cubic Feet

Volume, Cubic Yards

Gross Volume, Cubic Inches

175

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Table 17. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)

Content

Application

Identifier (AI)

Format

n4+n6

369 (***)

Gross Volume, Cubic Inches

Quantity of Units Contained (For Use With AI 02 Only)

Customer’s Purchase Order Number

Consignment Number

n2+n..8

400

n3+an..30

n3+n13

401

410

Ship To (Deliver To) Location Code Using EAN-13

Bill To (Invoice To) Location Code Using EAN-13

411

n3+n13

412

Purchase From (Location Code of Party From Whom Goods Are

Purchased)

n3+n13

413

414

420

421

8001

8003

8004

8005

8006

8018

8100

8101

8102

Ship For UCC/EAN Location Code

n3+n13

EAN Location Code For Physical Identification

Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code Within a Single Postal Authority

Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code With 3-Digit ISO Country Code Prefix

Roll Products-Width, Length, Core Diameter, Direction and Splices

UPC/EAN Number and Serial Number Or Returnable Asset

UCC/EAN Serial Identification

n3+n13

n3+an..20

n3+n3+an..9

n4+n14

n4+n14+an..16

n4+an..30

n4+n6

Identifies the Price Per Unit of Measure

Component of an Article

n4+n14+n2+n2

n4+n18

Service Relation Number

Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character and Offer

Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character, Offer and End of Offer

Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character Preceded by Zero

Mutually Agreed, Between Trading Partners

Intra-Company (Internal)

n4+n1+n5

n4+n1+n5+n4

n4+n1+n1

n2+an..30

Intra-Company (Internal)

Internal-Carriers

Intra-Company (Internal)

Internal

(*)To indicate only year and month, DD must be filled with “00”

(**) Plus one digit for length indication

(***) Plus one digit for decimal point indication

Data Value Representation:

a - alphabetic characters

n - numeric characters

an - alpha-numeric characters

an..3 - up to 3 alpha-numeric characters

n3 - 3 numeric characters, fixed length

n..3 - up to 3 numeric characters

176

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UCC/EAN-128

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start and stop codes identify the leading and trailing ends of the bar code.

UCC/EAN-128 uses unique start codes for character subsets B and C, and a

stop code common to both. An automatic mode switching feature is used to

generate the correct start code based on the first four data field characters.

Data Field

UCC/EAN-128 bar codes require a special character called “Function 1”

(FNC1) to immediately follow the start code. IGP automatically supplies this

character, so it must not be included in the data field by the user.

A character is made up of three bars and three spaces, each varying in width

from 1 to 4 modules, for a total of eleven modules. The number of modules

making up the bars is even. The stop code has four bars and is 13 modules

wide.

The character set for UCC/EAN-128 is the same as the character set for Code

128. Refer to the Code 128 Character Set, Table 13 and Table 14. Every

character is interpreted according to the currently active character subset.

UCC/EAN-128 uses subset B and subset C only. Subset B, shown in Table

13, includes all standard alphanumeric keyboard characters, lowercase

alphabetical characters, and special characters. Subset C interprets the

characters as pairs of numbers 00 through 99, along with some special

characters, as shown in Table 14. The start code or subset switch code

determines whether a particular bar code character is decoded as one

character or as a pair of numbers.

Readable Data

The optional printed data field (PDF) provides a human-readable

interpretation of the bar code data. When the printed data field is enabled by

use of the “PDF” parameter, the overall height of the bars is reduced to make

room for a guard band and the human-readable characters. The printed data

field will be formatted with spaces or parentheses denoting particular data

fields such as the application identifier. Special characters such as start, stop,

subset switch, modulo-103 check digit, and FNC1 do not appear in the

human-readable data.

The readable data is oriented along the bar code from start code to stop code.

It may be positioned above or below a bar code, and the bar code may be

horizontal, vertical, or inverted.

177

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Modulo-103 Check Digit

A modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar

code symbol immediately in front of the stop code, in the same manner as the

C128 bar code. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code is

included in the check digit algorithm. The modulo-103 check digit is not

displayed in the readable data field.

Modulo-10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC-18 and SCC-14

AI 00 (called the Serial Shipping Container Code, or SSCC-18) takes

eighteen additional numerical data bytes. The last data byte is a modulo-10

check digit on the preceding seventeen data bytes. Counting the two zeros of

the application identifier, the modulo-10 check digit is the twentieth byte in the

data field.

AI 01 (called the Shipping Container Code, or SCC-14) takes fourteen

additional numerical data bytes. The last data byte is a modulo-10 check digit

on the preceding thirteen data bytes. Counting the zero and the one of the

application identifier, the modulo-10 check digit is the sixteenth byte in the

data field.

The modulo-10 data field check digit for both SSCC-18 and SCC-14 is printed

in the bar code as the second half of the last number pair using subset C. It is

displayed in the human-readable data field as the twentieth byte for SSCC-18

or the sixteenth byte for SCC-14.

IGP/PGL automatically calculates the modulo-10 check digit for SSCC-18 if

only 17 data digits are provided following the application identifier of 00.

178

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UCC/EAN-128

Code UCC-128 Command Format

BARCODE

UCC-128; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT] ]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

UCC-128

Designates bar code type Code UCC/EAN-128;

enter UCC-128.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify the bar code symbol

by increasing the width of the bars and spaces. The

magnification default value is X1. Increasing the

magnification adjusts printed character density as

shown in Table 8. You can also use XR as defined

on page 89. You must specify eight digits for

variable ratio. They stand for the widths of

alternating bars and spaces from the narrowest to

the widest. Note that a valid UCC/EAN-128 bar

code can be no larger than 165 mm (6.5 inches)

wide.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height of

the bar code symbol (including the upper and lower

0.1 inch guard bands and any human-readable

data). Height adjustments are made in 0.1 inch

increments; enter H and a value from 3 through 99

to select height adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9

inches. The default value is 0.9 inch. The [.m]

provides an additional number of dots for the bar

code height. (Dots are in the current scale).

Note

If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be

included.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

179

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with the maximum number of

characters in the field. The actual data

provided dynamically during the Execute Form

mode can be less than L. It is permitted to

supply no data at all.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters

to use during Execute Form mode.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes.

Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page 28

for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command, or use the

CP.DP format.

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command, or use

the CP.DP format.

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used on both ends of the data field. It will

not print with the data.

data field

The bar code data. The data field for UCC/EAN-

128 consists of an “application identifier” (AI) of two

to four numbers, followed by data of appropriate

length (variable or fixed) and type (numeric or

alphanumeric). See Table 17 for a list of application

identifiers and their associated data fields.

The FNC1 character is required as the first

character after the start code for UCC/EAN-128 bar

codes, and IGP will always generate it

automatically. It will appear in the bar code but not

in the human readable field. Do not supply FNC1 in

the data field.

180

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UCC/EAN-128

The start code and subset switching is done

automatically by IGP based on the data field

contents so that the bar code length is minimized.

Subset C encodes each pair of numbers as a single

bar code character, providing a higher character

density. If the first four data digits are numbers, the

bar code starts in subset C; otherwise it starts in

subset B. The subset will switch from B to C at any

point in the data field if the next four characters are

numbers, and will switch from C to B if the next two

characters are not numbers or only one character

remains.

The data field can contain any of the characters

listed in Table 13 except the system SFCC and the

character used as a delimiter.

PDF

LOC

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If this parameter is not used, the human

readable data will not print. This parameter is not

allowed if a null data field was specified.

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above the bar code.

The height of the bar code body is reduced to

compensate for the human readable field and the

guard bands.

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to identify the font of the

printable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi.

Ends the bar code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not encountered, an error message

results.

181

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Code UCC/EAN-128 Examples

The following example generates the SSCC-18 variant of an UCC/EAN-128

bar code in horizontal orientation at the default ratio, and vertically at a user

defined ratio of double normal size.

~CREATE;UCCTEST

/ Horizontal bar code is dark, nominal width, start row 35,

start column 15.

/ Human-readable field is below the bar code in OCR-B font.

BARCODE

UCC-128;DARK;35;15

"0034567890123456789"

PDF;X

STOP

/ Vertical bar code is dark, double width, start row 35, start

column 50.

/ Human-readable data field is above the bar code in normal 10

cpi font.

BARCODE

UCC-128;VSCAN;XR2:2:4:4:6:6:8:8;H12;DARK;35;50

"0034567890123456789"

PDF;A

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;UCCTEST

~NORMAL

182

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UCC/EAN-128

The program below illustrates incremental UCC/EAN-128 bar codes.

Incremental UCC/EAN-128 bar code syntax requires that the STARTMASK

field be one character wider than the data field. Put an extra “X” on the left

side of the STARTMASK, since the data is right-justified in the STARTMASK

field.

~CREATE;UCCINC;140

/ Purchase Order number (incremental)

/ Note that there are 14 characters in the data,

/ and the STARTMASK is 15 characters wide.

/ The mask is set to increment only the last five numbers of

the data.

BARCODE

UCC-128;I;DARK;3;20

+XXXXXXXXXX00001;"400PO119600001"

PDF;B

STOP

ALPHA

DARK;1;20;0;0;"PURCHASE ORDER NUMBER"

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;UCCINC;3

~NORMAL

183

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

The following example shows the use of dynamic data. The ship-to-postal

code, AI 420, is used to encode 5 digit ZIP Codes.

~CREATE;UCCDYN;140

BARCODE

UCC-128;BF1;8;3;20

PDF;X

STOP

ALPHA

DARK;1;20;0;0;"SHIP TO POSTAL"

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;UCCDYN

~BF1;"42092614"

~NORMAL

~EXECUTE;UCCDYN

~BF1;"42090210"

~NORMAL

~EXECUTE;UCCDYN

~BF1;"42090028"

~NORMAL

184

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC-A

The UPC-A bar code structure is shown in Figure 38 and described on the

following pages.

SR, SC

POSITION

START CODE

CENTER CODE

STOP CODE

QUIET

ZONE

LEFT DATA

FIELD

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

2- or 5-

DIGIT

HEIGHT

Normal

INV

ADD-ON

CODE

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

CHECK DIGIT

CHARACTER

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER FIELD

OPTIONAL READABLE

DATA FIELD

CHARACTER FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

QUIET

ZONE

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

RIGHT DATA

FIELD

LEFT DATA

FIELD

START CODE

STOP CODE

CENTER

CODE

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER

CHECK DIGIT

CHARACTER

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

2- or 5-

QUIET

ZONE

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

SR, SC

POSITION

NUMBER

CCW

CHARACTER

SYSTEM

START CODE

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

CHECK

SR, SC

POSITION

DIGIT

CHARACTER

STOP CODE

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

CENTER

CODE

RIGHT

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

RIGHT

DATA

FIELD

CENTER CODE

FIELD

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

LEFT

DATA

FIELD

STOP CODE

NUMBER

QUIET

ZONE

CHECK

DIGIT

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

START CODE

CHARACTER

FIELD

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

HEIGHT

Figure 38. UPC-A Structure

185

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. The IGP automatically produces an 11-module wide

left quiet zone; you are responsible for providing sufficient space (minimum of

seven modules) on the form for the right quiet zone. The number system

character is also printed automatically in the left quiet zone.

Start/Center/Stop Codes

The start/center/stop codes are special character codes marking those

portions of the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Number System Character

The number system character field allows you to provide a code to a class or

type of item. The first character in the data field is used as the number system

character.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start,

Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four

modules. Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven

modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right

data field to permit read direction sensing.

The optional 2- or 5-digit add-on data field is placed at the end of the bar code

and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price, respectively.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code

symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar

code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number system

character is included in the check digit algorithm.

186

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC-A

UPC-A Command Format

BARCODE

UPC-A [+n];[DIR;] [SCB;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;]SR;SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

UPC-A

Designates bar code type UPC-A; enter UPC-A.

Optional parameter to provide a 2- or 5-digit add-on

code at the end of the bar code data field. Enter a

plus sign (+) and a value of 2 or 5. The first bar of

the add-on code is separated by nine modules from

the last bar of the UPC symbol and a left guard

pattern.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

SCB

This option shortens the length of the center guard

bars, which are normally full length.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. Enter a magnification value

from Table 8 to increase the magnification.

Increasing the magnification adjusts printed

character density. You can also use XR or XRD as

defined on page 89. (You must specify 8 digits for

MAG for variable ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 4 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.4 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 1.3 inches. The [.m] provides an

additional number of dots for the bar code height.

(Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form. With this

parameter, the actual data for the bar code data

field is provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

187

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. The length of the data field need not be

specified, since it is fixed at 11 digits, plus any

add-on data.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes.

Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page 28

for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. (It will not print with

the data.) Use the same character at both ends of

the data field.

data field

Enter the characters for the bar code data,

restricted to exactly 11 digits. If the 2- or 5-digit

add-on data option is used, include this data at the

end of the data field. The first digit is interpreted as

the number system character. The remaining 10

digits are the data field characters. The characters

available for the data field and number system are

0 through 9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).

188

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC-A

PDF

Optional parameter which affects printing of the

human readable data field. The data field will print

automatically unless the PDF-suppress command

is specified in the FONT parameter. UPC-A human

readable fields can be printed above or below the

bar code symbol. If the PDF command is not

entered in the UPC-A command format, the data

field automatically prints in OCR-B.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above the bar code.

To compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data,

the height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1-inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default font type for UPC-A

bar codes is OCR-B; if no PDF command is

entered in the command format, the data field is

printed automatically in OCR-B. Entering X will also

designate the OCR-B type font. Enter N to select

the normal ASCII 10 cpi font; enter O to select the

OCR-A 10 cpi font. Enter P to select 12 cpi. Enter Q

to select 13 cpi. Enter R to selct 15 cpi. Enter T to

select 17 cpi. Enter V to select 20 cpi. Enter S to

suppress printing the data field and the trailing

lower portions of the UPC bar code.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

189

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

UPC-A Example

Figure 39 illustrates a horizontal and vertical UPC-A bar code generated by

the following program:

~CREATE;UPCA

(Enter Create Form mode)

(Bar Code command)

BARCODE

UPC-A+5;H9;DARK;39;15

(Dark Code UPC-A, 5-digit

add-on, H 0.9, SR 39, SC 15)

*1234567887655555* (Data Field plus 5-digit add-on data field)

PDF

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

STOP

BARCODE

UPC-A+5;VSCAN;H12;DARK;39;50

(Vertical Dark UPC-A, 5-digit

add-on,H 1.2, SR 39, SC 50)

*1234567887655555* (Data Field plus 5-digit add-on data field)

PDF

(Printable Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Executes the form, form count of 1)

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;UPCA;1

SC 50

SC 15

SR 39

Figure 39. Sample UPC-A Bar Codes with Add-On Data

190

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC-E and UPC-E0

The UPC-E and UPC-E0 bar code structure is shown in Figure 40 and

described on the following pages.

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

DATA

FIELD

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

Normal

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

HEIGHT

CHECK

DIGIT

CHARACTER

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

OPTIONAL

READABLE

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER FIELD DATA FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

HEIGHT

INV

DATA

FIELD

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER FIELD

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER

CHECK DIGIT

CHARACTER

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

CHECK

DIGIT

CHARACTER

START CODE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

CCW

NUMBER SYSTEM

CHARACTER FIELD

STOP CODE

DATA

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

CHECK

DIGIT

FIELD

STOP CODE

NUMBER

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

FIELD

CHECK

QUIET

ZONE

DIGIT

START CODE

CHARACTER

2- or 5-

DIGIT

ADD-ON

CODE

NUMBER

QUIET

ZONE

SYSTEM

CHARACTER

HEIGHT

Figure 40. UPC-E and UPC-E0 Structure

191

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

Quiet zones extend on both ends of the bar code to permit the scan to begin

and end in a blank area. The IGP automatically produces an 11-module wide

left quiet zone. You must provide sufficient space (minimum of seven

modules) on the form for the right quiet zone. The number system character is

also printed automatically in the left quiet zone.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes are special character codes marking those portions of

the bar code. These codes are automatically provided.

Number System Character

The number system character field for all UPC-E and UPC-E0 bar codes must

be zero.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to

represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start

and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from one through four modules.

Each character consists of two bars and two spaces that total seven modules.

For UPC-E, eleven digits are expected, which are compressed down to the

six encoded symbol characters. For UPC-E0, six compressed digits are

expected.

The optional 2- or 5-digit add-on data field is placed at the end of the bar code

and typically identifies a periodical issue number or price, respectively.

Readable Data

The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can either be suppressed or printed above or below the bar code

symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar

code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The number system

character is included in the check digit algorithm.

192

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC-E and UPC-E0

UPC-E Command Format

BARCODE

type [+n]; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

type

Designates bar code type UPC-E or UPC-E0; enter

UPC-E or UPC-E0.

Optional parameter to provide a 2- or 5-digit add-on

code at the end of the bar code. Enter plus (+) and

a value of 2 or 5. The first bar of the add-on code is

separated by nine modules from the last bar of the

UPC symbol and a left guard pattern.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. Enter a magnification value

from Table 8 to increase the magnification.

Increasing the magnification adjusts printed

character density. You can also use XR or XRD as

defined on page 89. (You must specify 8 digits for

MAG for variable ratio.)

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 4 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.4 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 1.3 inches. The [.m] provides an

additional number of dots for the bar code height.

(Dots are in the current dot scale.)

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form. With this

parameter, the actual data for the bar code data

field is provided dynamically during the Execute

Form mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form mode. To use this field:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

193

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

c. The length of the data field need not be

specified, since it is fixed at 6 or 11 digits, plus

any add-on data.

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker bar codes.

Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on page 28

for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field but it will

not print with the data.

data field

The characters available for the data field are 0

through 9 (30 through 39 hex, respectively).

For UPC-E, eleven digits are expected: Enter the

number system character first by entering 0;

followed by the five-digit manufacturer number;

ending with the five-digit item number. The

manufacturing number and item number

sequences must conform to one of the number

pattern sequences shown in Table 18.

The IGP will compress the 11 characters of data

down to the six encoded UPC-E symbol characters.

Include the 2- or 5-digit add-on data at the end of

this data field.

For UPC-E0, six digits are expected. These six

digits must be a valid compressed UPC-E number.

Otherwise, Error 96 will be generated.

194

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC-E and UPC-E0

PDF

Optional parameter which affects printing of the

human readable data field. The data field will print

automatically unless the PDF-suppress command

is specified in the FONT parameter. UPC-E data

fields can be printed above or below the bar code

symbol. If the PDF is not entered in the UPC-E

command format, the data field automatically prints

in OCR-B.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above bar code. To

compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the

height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1-inch.

FONT

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. The default font type for UPC-A

bar codes is OCR-B; if no PDF command is

entered in the command format, the data field is

printed automatically in OCR-B. Entering X will also

designate the OCR-B type font. Enter N to select

the normal ASCII 10 cpi font; enter O to select the

OCR-A 10 cpi font. Enter P to select 12 cpi. Enter Q

to select 13 cpi. Enter R to selct 15 cpi. Enter T to

select 17 cpi. Enter V to select 20 cpi. Enter S to

suppress printing the data field and the trailing

lower portions of the UPC bar code.

STOP

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP

continues in the Create Form mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

195

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Table 18. Eleven-Digit Compression

Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

1. Manufacturer’s Number

(

)

(

)

(

)

first two digits of

manufacturer’s

number

last three digits of

the product number

third digit of the

manufacturer’s

number, use 0

through 2 only

2. Manufacturer’s Number

Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

(

)

(

)

( 3 )

depends on how

first three digits of

manufacturer’s

number

last two digits of the

product number; use many digits appear

00-99 only

in the

manufacturer’s

number

3. Manufacturer’s Number

Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

(

)

(

)

( 4 )

first four digits of

manufacturer’s

number

last digit of product

number, use 0

through 9 only

depends on how

many digits appear

in the

manufacturer’s

number

4. Manufacturer’s Number

Product Numbers that can be used 00000-00999

(

)

(

)

all five digits of

manufacturer’s

number

last digit of product

number, use 5-9

only

196

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPC-E and UPC-E0

Table 19. Six-Digit Zero Expansion

if the 6 digit number ends

with:

then the MFPS number is:

and the Product Number is:

the first 2 digits (of the zero

00 plus the THIRD, FOURTH

Example: 124560

suppressed number) plus 000 and FIFTH digit (of the zero

12000

suppressed number)

00456

the first two digits plus 100

27100

same as above

00583

Example: 275831

the first two digits plus 200

41200

same as above

00202

Example: 412022

the first three digits plus 00

87600

000 plus the FOURTH and

FIFTH digit

Example: 876543

00054

the first four digits plus 0

75370

0000 plus the FIFTH digit

00007

Example: 753774

5, 6, 7, 8, 9

Examples:

213756

the first five digits of the zero

suppressed number

21375

0000 plus the SIXTH digit

00006

00009

517019

51701

UPC-E Example

Figure 41 illustrates a horizontal and vertical UPC-E bar code generated by

the following program:

~CREATE;UPCE

BARCODE

UPC-E+2;H9;D;34;15

*0927400000522*

PDF

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;UPCE;1

~NORMAL

SC 15

SR 34

Figure 41. Sample UPC-E Bar Code

197

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

UPCSHIP

The structure for the UPCSHIP bar code is shown in Figure 42 and described

on the following pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 42. UPCSHIP Structure

198

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPCSHIP

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones

must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate

reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes from

overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop

codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field

The bar code symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to

represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or

spaces) and 3 narrow elements. The UPCSHIP barcode must contain exactly

13 digits of numeric data.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-10 check digit is inserted automatically into the bar code to verify

accurate scanning.

199

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

UPCSHIP Command Format

BARCODE

UPCSHIP; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;] [DARK;] SR; SC

(D)data field(D)

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

UPCSHIP

Designates bar code type UPCSHIP; enter

UPCSHIP.

DIR

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. As required for scanning, enter

a magnification value from Table 8 to increase the

magnification. Increasing the magnification adjusts

printed character density. You can also use XR or

XRD as defined on page 89.

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 0.9-inch.

[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

NOTE: If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be included.

BFn

Optional parameter for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form. With this

parameter, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form Mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps:

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. The length of the data field need not be

specified, since it is fixed at 13 digits, plus any

add-on data.

200

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPCSHIP

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on

page 28 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 89),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

89), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it

will not print with the data.

data field

The barcode data. The UPCSHIP barcode requires

exactly 13 characters of data. The available

characters are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through hex 39).

The modulo-10 check digit is automatically included

in the barcode.

PDF

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If the parameter is not used, the human

readable data is not printed.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above bar code. To

compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the

height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1-inch.

201

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

UPCSHIP Example

~CREATE;UPCSHIP

BARCODE

(Enter Create Form Mode)

(Bar Code command)

UPCSHIP;H12;9;8

(UPCSHIP Bar Code, height 1.2 inches,

at SR 9, SC 8)

*0014154401171*

PDF

STOP

BARCODE

(Data Field)

(Print Data Field)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(New Bar Code command)

UPCSHIP;VSCAN;3;45 (Vertical UPCSHIP Bar Code at SR 3, SC 45)

*1141281029432*

(Data Field)

PDF;A

STOP

END

(Print Data Field above the bar code)

(Ends Bar Code command)

(Terminates Create Form Mode)

~EXECUTE;UPCSHIP;1 (Execute the form, form count of 1)

SC 45

SR 3

SC 8

SR 9

Figure 43. Sample UPCSHIP Bar Codes

202

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPS 11

The UPS 11 structure is shown in Figure 44 and described on the following

pages.

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

SR, SC

POSITION

SR, SC

POSITION

STOP

CODE

START

CODE

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

CCW

DATA

FIELD

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

READABLE

DATA

FIELD

OPTIONAL

CHECK

DIGIT

START

CODE

STOP

CODE

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

UPPER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

LOWER

GUARD

BAND

QUIET

ZONE

QUIET

ZONE

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

SR, SC

POSITION

UPPER GUARD BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET START

ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET

CODE ZONE

Normal

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

SR, SC

POSITION

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

QUIET STOP

ZONE CODE

START QUIET

CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

INV

UPPER GUARD BAND

OPTIONAL

CHECK DIGIT

Figure 44. UPS 11 Structure

203

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

Quiet Zone

Both ends of the bar code structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet

zones must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure

accurate reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent bar codes

from overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet

zones.

Start/Stop Codes

The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the bar code. Each

of the UPS 11 subsets uses a unique start code and a common stop code,

both automatically provided by the IGP/PGL.

Data Field

UPS 11 is a special case of Code 128 (page 108). This bar code is restricted

to 10 data characters. The first character must be 0 through 9 or A through Z.

The remaining nine digits must be 0 through 9.

Readable Data

The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the bar

code data. It can be printed above or below the bar code symbol.

Check Digit

The modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the bar

code symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start code is

included in the check digit algorithm.

UPS 11 Command Format

BARCODE

UPS11; [DIR;] [MAG;] [Hn[.m];] [BFn;L;] [DARK;] SR; SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

BARCODE The Bar Code command; enter BARCODE.

UPS11

DIR

Designates bar code type UPS 11; enter UPS11.

Optional parameter that allows for rotating a

barcode. Enter CW for clockwise rotation. Enter

CCW or VSCAN for counter-clockwise rotation.

Enter INV for inverted rotation. If DIR is not

entered, the barcode is horizontally oriented.

MAG

Optional parameter to magnify (horizontally

expand) the bar code symbol. The magnification

default value is X1. Increasing the magnification

adjusts printed character density as shown in Table

8. You can also use XR or XRD as defined on page

89. (You must specify 8 digits for MAG for variable

ratio.)

204

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPS 11

Hn[.m]

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height

(vertical expansion) of the bar code symbol

(including the upper and lower 0.1-inch guard

bands and any human readable data). Height

adjustments are made in 0.1-inch increments; enter

H and a value from 3 through 99 to select height

adjustments from 0.3 through 9.9 inches. The

default value is 0.9 inch.

[.m] is an additional number of dots for the bar code

height. (Dots are in the current dot scale.)

Note

If 0.3 inches is the selected height, the PDF cannot be

included.

BFn;L

Optional parameters for assigning a dynamic bar

code data field location on a form and for

designating the length of the data field. With these

parameters, the actual data for the bar code data

field is dynamically provided during the Execute

Form Mode; the data is not specified during the

Create Form Mode. To use this field, perform the

following steps.

a. Enter BF.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code field. The

SR and SC parameters specify the exact

location of the bar code field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equaling the total

number of characters in the field. (The actual

data provided dynamically during the Execute

Form Mode can be less than L.)

d. The information for the data field is entered

dynamically during the Execute Form Mode.

(Refer to “Execute Form: Dynamic Bar Code

Data” on page 63.) Do not use the data field

parameter to enter data when the BFn;L

parameters are used. However, refer to the

data field description for available characters.

DARK

Optional parameter to produce darker looking bar

codes. Enter DARK. Refer to “Dark Printing” on

page 28 for more information.

Defines the starting row for the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from row 1 to one less than the

length of the form. Character row or dot row is

specified based on the Scale command (page 83),

or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

205

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Bar Codes

(D)

Defines the starting column of the bar code. Enter a

value ranging from column 1 to one less than the

width of the form. Character column or dot column

is specified based on the Scale command (page

83), or use the CP.DP format (page 26).

The printable character (delimiter) identifying the

start and finish of the data field. Enter any printable

character other than a slash (/), the SFCC, or a

character used within the data. The same character

must be used at both ends of the data field, but it

will not print with the data.

data field

PDF

Enter the data for the bar code. This bar code is

restricted to 10 data characters. The first character

must be 0 through 9 or A through Z. The remaining

nine digits must be 0 through 9.

Optional parameter to enable printing of the human

readable data field. Enter PDF to print the data

field. If the parameter is not used, the human

readable data will not print. This parameter is not

allowed if a null data field was specified.

LOC

Optional parameter to identify the location of the

printable data field. The default value is B, locating

the human readable data below the bar code. A

locates the printable data field above bar code. To

compensate for printing the 0.1-inch high data, the

height of the bar code body is reduced 0.1 inch.

FONT

STOP

Optional parameter to select the font for the human

readable data field. Enter O to select OCR-A font;

enter X to select OCR-B font; enter N to select 10

cpi; enter P to select 12 cpi; enter Q to select 13

cpi; enter R to select 15 cpi; enter T to select 17 cpi;

enter V to select 20 cpi.

Ends the Bar Code command while the IGP/PGL

continues in the Create Form Mode. Enter STOP. If

STOP is not entered, an error message results.

Note

Access for the alternate set of control function characters is

by using SO (Shift Out, hex 0E). The SO control code

identifies the next character as the control function

character, and must be inserted before each alternate

character required. The SO character is selectable from the

printer’s front panel (see your User’s Guide).

206

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

UPS 11

UPS 11 Example

Figure 45 illustrates a vertical UPS 11 bar code generated by the following

program:

~CREATE;UPS11

BARCODE

UPS11;VSCAN;H9;34;15

*01234567895*

PDF

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;UPS11;1

~NORMAL

Figure 45. Sample UPS 11 Bar Code

207

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Incremental Bar Code Fields

With the incremental bar code fields feature, you can update bar code (and

alphanumeric) data fields in a numeric or alphabetical manner automatically

with just one set of data sent from the host computer. You can print up to

65,535 forms with incremental fields automatically updated.

Note

Throughout the discussion of incremental fields, the term

“increment” or “incremental” means the field is automatically

updated by a specified amount (or increment). You can

actually increment the field by a positive amount (added) or

a negative amount (subtracted) as specified within the

command.

You can use bar code incremental fields with fixed (static) data input as part

of the Create Form mode, or with dynamic data supplied in the Execute Form

mode. New formats and parameters are required in the bar code commands

for static and dynamic incremental fields. In addition, the Execute Form

command requires a new format and parameters when you use incremental

fields with dynamic data. You can increment or decrement incremental fields,

repeat at specified intervals before updating, and reset to the starting value

after a specified number of increments.

Incrementing Bar Code Data

The IGP internally counts incremental static (fixed) bar code data fields. A

maximum of 255 incremental fixed bar code data fields are allowed per form.

Incrementing is controlled with the STEPMASK and STARTDATA command

parameters as described in Table 20. The parameters are part of the bar code

command or part of the Execute command when using the Incremental Bar

Code Dynamic Data command.

The STEPMASK parameter performs three functions:

1. It defines the increment amount (step);

2. It defines the number of characters allowed in the data field

(STARTDATA); and

3. It provides a “mask” to link or unlink subfields of data for individual

incremental activity. The data provided in the STEPMASK field combined

with the data in the STARTDATA field determine the result of these

functions.

208

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Incrementing Bar Code Data

Table 20. Incremental Bar Code Data

STEPMASK STARTDATA

Character Type and Function

0-9

A-Z

Alpha characters are incremented by

amount in STEPMASK field.

0-9

Numeric characters are incremented by

amount in STEPMASK field.

Space

Same character type as character in the

next right adjacent, linked increment

position. Character type is numeric if in

the least significant position.

0-9

Not A-Z or

0-9

Error

Not 0-9 or L

Any

Non-incrementing alphanumeric

character.

Any

Linked, non-incrementing alphanumeric

character.

The increment amount is defined by the numeric value of the STEPMASK

data. For example, a STEPMASK value of 1 increments the STARTDATA by

1; a STEPMASK value of 2 increments the STARTDATA by 2.

The maximum number of characters allowed in the STARTDATA is defined

by the number of characters in the STEPMASK field and depends on the

specific type of bar code; the STARTDATA field cannot contain more

characters than used in the STEPMASK field and can only contain the

number and type of characters allowed by the bar code.

Linked and unlinked masking of subfields within the STARTDATA is defined

by using the L value in the STEPMASK field. L indicates linked but

nonincrementing data in the corresponding position of the STARTDATA field.

Any alphanumeric character other than L in the STEPMASK field indicates a

nonincrementing, non-linked STARTDATA subfield.

The following examples illustrate incrementing of bar code data fields. All

cases in the examples use a repeat count parameter value of 1 and a reset

count parameter value of 0. Incremental bar code data is generated identically

to incremental alphanumeric data except the IGP does not add leading

spaces to bar code data.

Note

In the following bar code examples, the value of the data is

shown automatically incrementing. In practical applications,

the bar code itself would print corresponding to the

incremented data as shown in the Auto Increment Fields

Example in the “Form Examples and Exercises” chapter.

209

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Incremental Bar Code Fields

Value

Description

STARTDATA: ABC123

STEPMASK:

Linked subfields: ABC and 123

RPT = 1

RST = 0

000001

Printed Results: ABC123

ABC124

......

ABC999

ABD000

......

ZZZ999

AAA000

Value

Description

STARTDATA: 1ABC123

STEPMASK:

Two separate but linked numeric

subfields: 1 and 123, while fixed data

ABC is nonincrementing

RPT = 1

0LLL001

Printed Results: 1ABC123

1ABC124

RPT = 0

. ...

1ABC999

2ABC000

Value

Description

STARTDATA: ABC123

STEPMASK:

Two separate unlinked subfields:

ABC and 3, while fixed data 1 and 2

is nonincrementing

RPT = 1

001XX1

Printed Results: ABC123

ABD124

. .

RPT = 0

. .

ABI129

ABJ120

210

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields

The Incremental Bar Code Fixed Data Fields command is a variation of the

standard IGP bar code commands. Use this command with the appropriate

parameters from the standard bar code command when automatic

incrementing of fixed bar code data fields is required. The Incremental Bar

Code Fixed Data Fields command format is shown and defined below.

(Incremental command parameters are shown in boldface type; standard bar

code command parameters and optional nonincremental parameters are

shown in italics.)

BARCODE

type; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn;] I; [DARK;] SR; SC

[idir] STEPMASK; [RPTn;] [RSTn;] (D)STARTDATA(D)

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

Identifies this bar code command as an

Incremental Bar Code command; enter I.

idir

The optional increment direction parameter to

specify an increment (add) or decrement (subtract)

to the data. Enter a plus sign (+) or leave the field

blank to increment (the default). Enter a minus sign

(-) to decrement.

STEPMASK Defines the increment amount (step), number of

character positions in the data field, and provides a

mask to control the increment function on specific

parts of the data. Refer to “Incrementing Bar Code

Data” on page 208 for complete information on

STEPMASK parameter values.

RPTn

The optional incremental repeat count parameter to

specify the number of times a particular field value

will repeat before it is incremented. A repeated field

value is useful when printing multiple rows/columns

of identical labels before increasing to the next

value. To use the repeat count parameter, enter

RPT and replace n with a numeric value ranging

from 1 through 65,535 to specify the repeat count.

The default repeat count parameter is 1, which will

increment the field value each time it is printed.

RSTn

The optional incremental reset count parameter to

specify the number of times an incremented field is

printed (on one or more forms) before it is reset to

the starting value. A reset count is useful when

printing a hierarchy of fields where a low-level field

generates a sequence of numbers, is reset, and the

next higher field level is incremented (such as in a

unit/box/carton application). To use the reset count

parameter, enter RST and replace n with a number

ranging from 1 through 65,535 to specify the reset

count. The default reset count value is 0.

211

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Incremental Bar Code Fields

STARTDATA Defines the starting value of the incrementing field.

The maximum amount of STARTDATA characters

must be less than or equal to the number of

characters in the STEPMASK field. Characters

allowed for incrementing fields is based on the type

of bar code; refer to the individual bar code

descriptions for information on valid type and

quantity of data characters. The STARTDATA must

be enclosed within standard printable character

delimiters just as a standard bar code data field is

enclosed within delimiters.

~CREATE;TEST;288

VDUP;3;6

BARCODE

(Enters Create Form mode)

(Bar code command)

C3/9;H7;I;6;5

-00001;*12345*

PDF

(Printable data field)

(Ends bar code command)

STOP

VDUP;OFF

END

(Terminates Create Form mode)

(Prints form)

~EXECUTE;TEST

~NORMAL

Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields

The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Field command specifies the

location and size of the incremental dynamic data field during the Create

Form mode. STEPMASK and STARTDATA parameters are supplied in the

Execute command during the Execute Form mode. As with standard dynamic

data fields, incremental dynamic data fields allow you to change the starting

data without changing the form definition program. Additionally, you can also

change the increment parameters with each new job without changing the

form definition program.

212

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields

The Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields command is a variation of

the standard IGP bar code commands. Use this command with the

appropriate parameters from the standard Bar Code command when

automatic incrementing of dynamic bar code data fields is required. The

Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Fields command format is shown and

defined below. (Incremental command parameters are shown in boldface

type; standard bar code command parameters and optional nonincremental

parameters are shown in italics.)

BARCODE

type; [VSCAN;] [MAG;] [Hn;] IBFn;L [DARK;] SR; SC

[PDF [;LOC] [;FONT]]

STOP

IBFn;L

Identifies this bar code command as an

Incremental Bar Code Dynamic Data Field

command. The command parameter string

identifies the incremental dynamic data field

location on the form and defines the length of the

bar code data.

Note

If these parameters are used, do not enter the STEPMASK

and STARTDATA parameters in the Create Form mode;

enter them dynamically during the Execute Form mode.

To use the incremental dynamic data field:

a. Enter IBF to specify an incremental bar code

dynamic data field.

b. Replace n with a number ranging from 1

through 512 to identify the bar code string

location on the form. The standard bar code

SR and SC command parameters specify the

exact location of the field identified by n.

c. Replace L with a number equal to the number

of characters in the dynamic bar code string

(STARTDATA). The number of characters and

type of characters depends on the type of bar

code used. Refer to the individual bar code

descriptions for information on type and

quantity of data allowed for the specific bar

code type.

d. Dynamically enter the STEPMASK and

STARTDATA parameters in the Execute Form

mode. The length of the data must be less

than or equal to the value assigned to the

length (L) parameter. Refer to “Execute Form:

Incremental Dynamic Data” on page 65 for

more information.

213

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Incremental Bar Code Fields

Duplicating Incremental Bar Code Fields

Fixed and dynamic incremental bar code data fields are duplicated

horizontally and vertically in the same way that incremental alphanumeric

fixed and dynamic data fields are duplicated. Refer to page 40 for more

information on duplicating incremental data.

~CREATE;TEST;288

VDUP;3;6

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;IBF1;6;D;6;5

PDF

STOP

VDUP;OFF

END

~EXECUTE;TEST

~IBF1;+000001;*123459*

~NORMAL

214

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Form Examples and

Exercises

Form Examples

The following example demonstrates how to use Create commands in the

Create Form mode using the CP.DP format. The printed output for this

program is shown in Figure 46 on page 217. The box surrounding the form

represents the paper size.

Note

If comment lines are used on command lines, they must be

preceded by a slash (/). Do not use / comments on lines

containing an SFCC (NORMAL, CREATE, EXECUTE, etc.).

Comments in parentheses in this section are provided for

better understanding of IGP operation but should not be

included in your IGP files.

IMPORTANT

The examples in this chapter assume the Select Format command is

already enabled (~SFON). When enabled, Select Format tells the IGP to

ignore all host-generated paper movement commands (CR, LF, FF).

Example: Basic Create Form

~LISTEN

~LOGO;HAND;56;60

1;40-42

2;38-42

3;36-42

4;35-42

5;33-41

6;31-40

7;30-38

8;29-36

9;28-35

10;27-34;52-54

11;24-33;48-54

12;22-31;45-54

13;19-30;41-54

14;16-29;38-53

15;13-29;36-51

16;11-29;33-48

17;9-44

18;7-42

19;6-39

20;4-36

215

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Examples

21;1-34

22;1-34

23;1-34

24;1-60

25;1-60

26;1-60

27;1-60

28;1-59

29;1-59

30;1-35

31;1-36

32;1-39

33;1-58

34;1-58

35;1-58

36;1-58

37;1-58

38;1-57

39;4-24

40;7-23

41;8-23

42;9-23

43;11-24

44;12-25

45;14-27

46;15-30

47;17-32

48;18-33

49;22-34

50;25-35

51;26-36

52;28-37

53;30-37

54;32-37

55;33-37

56;35-36

END

~CREATE;LEFTHAND

BOX

/LT;SR;SC;ER;EC

1;1;1;24;25

STOP

ALPHA

/[R[D][L];][E;][Cn;][AFn;L;][DIR;[UC;]DARK]SR;SC;VE;HE;(D)ASCII

TEXT(D)

3;3;0;0;*STATIC ALPHA DATA*

AF1;18;4;3;0;0

/DIR;SR;SC;VE;HE

CW;8;4;1;1;*Hewlett-Packard*

R;15;5;2;2;*IGP*

STOP

CORNER

/LT;SR;SC;ER;EC;VL;HL

1;18;2;23;7;2;2

STOP

HDUP;5;1

VERT

1;17;18;22

STOP

HDUP;OFF

VDUP;5;1

HORZ

1;18;17;21;1

216

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: Basic Create Form

STOP

VDUP;OFF

LOGO;LEFTHAND

10;13;HAND

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;LEFTHAND

~AF1;*DYNAMIC ALPHA DATA*

OVERLAY DATA

~NORMAL

Figure 46. Basic Create Form Example

217

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Examples

Example: Dynamic Data

The process of executing dynamic alphanumeric and bar code data fields is

explained in the following exercises. Each stage includes printing the

program; however, the total program may be entered as one unit. Each stage

offers the option of choosing features applicable to specific needs.

Basic Design

The SAMPLE program below, shown in Figure 47, is a basic design in CP.DP

format and defined by standard Create Form mode command sequences.

The label is duplicated twice horizontally on an approximate form size of 8 1/2

x 5 1/2 inches, with three bar code locations specified per label. The result is

two “forms”: two labels per form, four labels printed on one 8 1/2 x 11 inch

“page.” On the next few pages, you will add bar code data, dynamic

alphanumeric data, and dynamic bar code data. Then you will execute and

print the complete form (Figure 48).

When entering command lines, remember to correctly terminate each line

with a line feed or carriage return with line feed. Use your system commands

to open a file for the label program. When you have finished, exit the file (if

necessary for your system) and print.

~CREATE;SAMPLE;390

HDUP;2;37

BOX

2;3.5;9;30;35

STOP

HORZ

1;14.5;9;35

1;19.5;9;35

1;24.5;9;35

STOP

CORNER

2;4;11;9;33;1.2;2

2;9.6;11;13.6;33;1.2;2

STOP

ALPHA

4.8;12;0;0;*FROM:*

6.3;14;2;2;*ACME INC.*

C15;7.3;16;0;0;*17500 CARTWRIGHT RD*

C15;8.1;16;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714*

10;12;0;0;*TO*

14.8;11;0;0;*S.O.*

19.8;11;0;0;*S/N:*

24.8;11;0;0;*P/N:*

STOP

HDUP;OFF

END

~EXECUTE;SAMPLE;1

~NORMAL

218

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: Dynamic Data

Figure 47. Sample Form

219

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Examples

Bar Code Fields

Identify the location of the data fields for each of the six bar codes (one

location at each S.O., S/N, and P/N field on the form). The type of bar code

and the human readable data information is also specified within the bar code

commands. (Refer to the “Bar Codes” chapter for detailed bar code

information.)

Each bar code must be designated separately. The bar code commands are

part of the Create Form mode; therefore, they must be entered in the Create

Form mode before the END command. However, because each dynamic field

is assigned a unique number, the commands should not be duplicated.

Reopen the file and input the following commands before the END command

line but after the HDUP;OFF command.

Note

The IGP will horizontally or vertically duplicate dynamic bar

code or alphanumeric data fields if required. This will also

duplicate the n parameter identifying the dynamic data

fields. If unique data fields are required, do not duplicate the

commands.

BARCODE

(First bar code command)

(Upper left S.O. field, assigned number 1)

C3/9;H7;BF1;8;DARK;15.1;10.4

PDF;O

STOP

BARCODE

(Print the data field in OCR-A font)

(Stop the first bar code command)

(New bar code command)

(Upper left S/N field, assigned number 2)

C3/9;H7;BF2;8;DARK;20;10.4

PDF;O

STOP

BARCODE

(Upper left P/N field, assigned number 3)

C3/9;H7;BF3;8;DARK;25.5;10.4

PDF;O

STOP

BARCODE

(Upper right S.O. field, assigned number 4)

C3/9;H7;BF4;8;DARK;15.1;47.4

PDF;O

STOP

BARCODE

(Upper right S/N field, assigned number 5)

C3/9;H7;BF5;8;DARK;20;47.4

PDF;O

STOP

BARCODE

(Upper right P/N field, assigned number 6)

C3/9;H7;BF6;8;DARK;25.5;47.4

PDF;O

STOP

(Stop the bar code command)

220

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: Dynamic Data

Dynamic Alphanumeric Fields

Identify the location of the dynamic alphanumeric fields using the

alphanumerics command. Input the following alphanumeric command lines

after the HDUP;OFF command and before the Create Form mode END line.

A separate alphanumerics command sequence is used in order to assign

unique numbers to each dynamic data field. If unique identifying numbers

were not required, these alphanumeric commands would be added to the

existing alphanumeric commands being duplicated to produce the fixed form

alphanumeric data.

Note

Before the following dynamic data commands can be

entered, delete the form count parameter from the existing

Execute command line (the ;1 at the end of the Execute

command line shown on the program on page 218). The

Form Count parameter cannot be used when data is

supplied dynamically. The Execute command line should

now read ~EXECUTE;SAMPLE and must be correctly

terminated. This is the Execute command for the first page

of dynamic data.

ALPHA

(Begin alpha command for dynamic data)

AF1;20;10.8;12;0;0 (AF1=the first line of upper left TO area)

AF2;20;11.8;12;0;0 (AF2=second line of upper left TO area)

AF3;20;12.8;12;0;0 (AF3=third line of upper left TO area)

AF4;20;10.8;49;0;0 (AF4=first line of lower left TO area)

AF5;20;11.8;49;0;0 (AF5=second line of lower left TO area)

AF6;20;12.8;49;0;0 (AF6=third line of lower left TO area)

STOP

(Stop the alphanumerics command)

221

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Examples

Dynamic Alphanumeric and Bar Code Data

Enter the dynamic data following the Execute command. These dynamic data

commands will supply the variable data to the bar code and alphanumeric

fields previously identified in the Create Form mode. After entering the data,

exit the file (if necessary with your system) and print. The completed form is

shown in Figure 48.

~CREATE;SAMPLE;390

HDUP;2;37

BOX

2;3.5;9;30;35

STOP

HORZ

1;14.5;9;35

1;19.5;9;35

1;24.5;9;35

STOP

CORNER

2;4;11;9;33;1.2;2

2;9.6;11;13.6;33;1.2;2

STOP

ALPHA

4.8;12;0;0;*FROM:*

6.3;12;2;2;*ACME MOTOR*

C15;7.3;16;0;0;*17500 CARTWRIGHT RD*

C15;8.1;16;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714*

10;12;0;0;*TO*

14.8;11;0;0;*S.O.*

19.8;11;0;0;*S/N:*

24.8;11;0;0;*P/N:*

STOP

HDUP;OFF

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;BF1;8;DARK;15.1;10.4

PDF;0

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;BF2;8;DARK;20;10.4

PDF;0

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;BF3;8;DARK;25.5;10.4

PDF;0

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;BF4;8;DARK;15.1;47.4

PDF;0

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;BF5;8;DARK;20;47.4

PDF;0

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;BF6;8;DARK;25.5;47.4

PDF;0

STOP

ALPHA

AF1;20;10.8;12;0;0

AF2;20;11.8;12;0;0

AF3;21;12.8;12;0;0

AF4;20;10.8;49;0;0

AF5;20;11.8;49;0;0

222

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: Dynamic Data

AF6;20;12.8;49;0;0

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;SAMPLE

~AF1;*B AND C CO*

~AF2;*P.O. BOX 212*

~AF3;*LOS ANGELES, CA 90051*

~AF4;*M.H. INC.*

~AF5;*101 BEACH RD.*

~AF6;*MALIBU, CA 97772*

~BF1;*S05995*

~BF2;*011233*

~BF3;*190204*

~BF4;*S05996*

~BF5;*000535*

~BF6;*104523*

~NORMAL

~EXECUTE;SAMPLE

~AF1;*ABC CORPORATION*

~AF2;*1234 ANYWHERE ST.*

~AF3;*YOUR TOWN, MA 03498*

~AF4;*XYZ COMPUTERS*

~AF5;*845 N. ALLEN ST.*

~AF6;*WEST BEND, OR 97601*

~BF1;*S05997*

~BF2;*456789*

~BF3;*102245*

~BF4;*S05999*

~BF5;*567890*

~BF6;*103764*

~NORMAL

Multiple page documents must be separated by a form feed (the “page” of

data includes the Execute command, the dynamic data commands, and the

Normal command). Using the SFON command (described on page 84), a ~FF

(form feed) command will allow as many forms as required to print with the

appropriate new data supplied dynamically. When the SFOFF command is

used, send a hex 0C instead of ~FF to print multiple pages with new dynamic

data.

223

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Examples

Figure 48. Dynamic Data Example

224

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: Dynamic Data

Example: Auto Increment Fields

The following program, designed in accordance with current specifications for

AIAG-B-3 shipping label standards, creates four automatically incrementing/

decrementing AIAG labels with alphanumeric and bar code data. The printed

output of this program is shown on page 227.

~CREATE;AIAG

BOX

1;31.2;1;55.2;66.5

STOP

HORZ

1;38.5;1;66.5

1;44.9;1;40

1;49.10;1;40

STOP

VERT

1;26;38.5;44.9

1;40;44.9;55.2

STOP

ALPHA

C15;31.8;2;0;0;*PART NO*

C15;32.6;2;0;0;*(P)*

I;34.3;9;4;4;00000000002;*A0000000002*

C15;38.9;2;0;0;*QUANTITY*

C15;39.6;2;0;0;* (Q)*

40.5;8;4;4;*100*

C15;41.9;28;0;0;*SPECIAL*

C15;42.6;28;0;0;* (C)*

I;43.9;34;4;4;-00002;*A20UF*

C15;45;2;0;0;*SUPPLIER*

C15;45.10;2;0;0;* (V)*

45.7;7;2;2;* 040898755*

C15;50.4;2;0;0;*SERIAL*

C15;51.2;2;0;0;* (S)*

50.8;7;2;2;* 0002110*

C15;54.5;4;0;0;*ACME MOTOR, INC IRVINE CA 92713 (714) 863-1900*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;I;DARK;34.7;5.5

X000000002;*A000000002*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;DARK;40.9;5.5

*Q100*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;I;DARK;38.1;33

-X00002;*CA2OUF*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;DARK;45.11;5.5

*V040898755*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;DARK;50.9;5.5

*S0002110*

STOP

BOX

1;1.2;1;25.2;66.5

STOP

HORZ

1;8.4;1;66.5

225

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Examples

1;14.9;1;40

1;19.6;1;40

STOP

VERT

1;26;8.4;14.9

1;40;14.9;25.2

STOP

ALPHA

C15;1.8;2;0;0;*PART NO*

C15;2.6;2;0;0;*(P)*

I;4.3;9;4;4;00000000002;*A0000000001*

C15;8.9;2;0;0;*QUANTITY*

C15;9.6;2;0;0;* (Q)*

10.5;8;4;4;*100*

C15;11.9;28;0;0;*SPECIAL*

C15;12.6;28;0;0;* (C)*

I;13.9;34;4;4;-00002;*A2OUG*

C15;15;2;0;0;*SUPPLIER*

C15;15.10;2;0;0;* (V)*

15.6;7;2;2;* 040898755*

C15;20;2;0;0;*SERIAL*

C15;21;2;0;0;* (S)*

20.5;7;2;2;* 0002110*

C15;24.5;4;0;0;*ACME MOTOR,INC. IRVINE CA 92713 (714) 863-1900*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;I;DARK;4.7;5.5

X000000002;*A000000001*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;DARK;10.9;5.5

*Q100*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;I;DARK;8.1;33

-X00002;*CA20UG*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;DARK;15.7;5.5

*V040898755*

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H7;DARK;20.8;5.5

*S0002110*

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;AIAG;2

~NORMAL

226

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example: Dynamic Data

Figure 49. Auto Increment Fields Example

227

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Exercise

In the following example, you will create and execute a form. Using character

scaling (discussed in detail on page 83) on a 60 x 72 dot per inch (dpi) grid,

your form will include the following:

•

a box

a set of corners

vertical lines

alphanumeric data

horizontal lines

a bar code

This exercise will help you become familiar with the IGP by taking you through

14 steps to build a complete form. Detailed command descriptions for

producing forms, bar codes, and logos are described in the “Commands”

chapter.

All the data and commands for the form are entered into a file in the host

computer. The filename used in this exercise is PRACTC.FRM, and the form

name used is PRACTICE. If another form named PRACTICE already exists, it

will be deleted by this exercise.

Begin each step by reading the explanation. The information you input is

listed under the word Enter. The parameters of each command have a

specific order for data entry; input the data exactly as shown, but always use

the actual SFCC required by your system where the ~ is shown. The general

command format is listed under the word Format next to each example. The

SFCC is represented by (cc) in the general format.

Use the standard commands on your system to open, close, or print the file

with the form data where your system format is required.

Note

Do not forget to terminate each command line with a line

feed (or carriage return with line feed), or a paper motion

command. Enter all commands in uppercase. Make sure the

printer power is on and the printer is ONLINE.

Creating a Box and Corners

1. On your host computer, open/create a file for your practice form. For

example:

Enter

Format

PRACTC.FRM

(system format)

2. Enter the Create Form mode, and specify a form name. This is the first

input for every new form. Use the Create command and PRACTICE as

the form name.

Enter

Format

~CREATE;PRACTICE

(cc)CREATE[/];formname[;FL]

228

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a Box and Corners

3. The IGP is now ready for Create Form mode commands. Design a box

with a line thickness (LT) of 2 dots, a top left corner at starting row (SR)

35, starting column (SC) 16, and a bottom right corner at ending row (ER)

53, ending column (EC) 61. The STOP command must be entered to

inform the IGP that the Box command is complete.

Enter

Format

BOX

2;35;16;53;61

STOP

LT;SR;SC;ER;EC

STOP

4. Use the Corner command to set the box off with corners having a line

thickness (LT) of 3 dots, a top left corner at row (SR) 30, column (SC) 13,

a bottom right corner at row (ER) 57, column (EC) 64, a vertical length

(VL) 5 character spaces long, and a horizontal length (HL) 7 character

spaces long. The STOP command must be entered to stop the Corner

command and END must be entered to terminate the Create Form mode

to prepare for printing.

Enter

Format

CORNER

3;30;13;57;64;5;7

STOP

CORNER

LT;SR;SC;ER;EC;VL;HL

STOP

END

5. Now use the Execute command and form name to prepare for printing.

Enter a blank line using a terminator and then the Normal command to

instruct the IGP to return to the Normal mode after executing the form.

Enter

Format

~EXECUTE;PRACTICE

(cc)EXECUTE;formname[;PAGEn][;FC]

~NORMAL

(cc)NORMAL

6. To print the form, exit the file (if necessary for your system) and use the

system print command to print the file. For example, after exiting the file

and your system prompt returns:

Enter

Format

.PRINT PRACTC.FRM

(System Format)

The form should look like the one shown in Figure 50. When it was printed,

the form program was stored in the IGP memory. If errors are detected in the

program, error messages are printed and only the error-free portions of the

program are stored in the IGP memory. Refer to “Solving Program Errors” on

page 248.

229

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Exercise

SC 13

SR 30

SR 35

SC 16

ER 53

EC 61

ER 57

EC 64

Figure 50. Box and Corner Example

Adding Horizontal and Vertical Lines

7. Now return to the file. When the file reopens, the existing program (the

contents of the file) is displayed. Use your system commands to reopen

the file. For example:

Enter

Format

.PRACTC.FRM

(System Format)

8. All Create Form mode commands must be entered into the program

before the End command line. Add three horizontal lines, each with a

thickness (LT) of 1 at rows (R) 40, 45, and 49 and each ranging from

column (SC) 16 to column (EC) 61.

Enter

Format

HORZ

1;40;16;61

1;45;16;61

1;49;16;61

STOP

LT;R;SC;EC

STOP

9. Add two vertical lines, each with a thickness (LT) of 1, both in column (C)

49, one ranging from row (SR) 40 to row (ER) 45 and the other ranging

from row (SR) 49 to row (ER) 53.

Enter

Format

VERT

1;49;40;45

1;49;49;53

STOP

LT;C;SR;ER

STOP

230

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adding Fixed Alphanumeric Text

The last two commands have added to the form definition. PRACTICE

now looks like Figure 51.

COLUMN 49

ROW 40

ROW 45

ROW 49

Figure 51. Box/Corner Example with Horizontal and Vertical Lines

Adding Fixed Alphanumeric Text

10. Use the Create Form mode Alpha command to add some fixed

alphanumeric text to the form. Specify some compressed print (Cn), the

starting row (SR) and starting column (SC) for each alphanumeric string,

any vertically (VE) or horizontally (HE) expanded strings, and the

alphanumeric string itself which must be within the printable character

(quotation marks or asterisks, for example). Substitute your own name,

address, etc. in the appropriate areas. If you do not want to include some

of the data on your form, do not enter the line.

Enter

Format

ALPHA

31;22;0;0;*ACME MOTOR, INC.*

[R;][E;][Cn;][AFn;L;][DIR;][UC;][DARK]

SR;SC;VE;HE;(D)Text(D)

32;22;0;0;*17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD*

33;22;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714*

35.9;17;0;0;*SERIAL NUMBER*

40.3;17;0;0;*PART NUMBER*

40.3;50;0;0;*MFG. DATE*

45.3;17;0;0;*DESCRIPTION*

49.3;17;0;0;*INTERFACE*

49.3;50;0;0;*VERSION*

C13;31;16;0;0;*FROM:*

C15;54;26;0;0;*Call ACME MOTOR for more information.*

C15;55;34;0;0;*1(714)863-1900*

STOP

231

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Exercise

Note

The sample data entered above uses CP.DP format (such

as 35.9, 40.3, etc.) in the starting row (SR) parameters. This

precisely positions the data to avoid overlapping the

alphanumeric data with the box and horizontal line data

previously entered. For complete information on CP.DP

format, refer to the “Commands” chapter.

At this point, the PRACTC.FRM file should contain the following form program

data:

~CREATE;PRACTICE

BOX

2;35;16;53;61

STOP

CORNER

3;30;13;57;64;5;7

STOP

HORZ

1;40;16;61

1;45;16;61

1;49;16;61

STOP

VERT

1;49;40;45

1;49;49;53

STOP

ALPHA

31;22;0;0;*ACME MOTOR, INC*

32;22;0;0;*17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD*

33;22;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714*

35.9;17;0;0;*SERIAL NUMBER*

40.3;17;0;0;*PART NUMBER*

40.3;50;0;0;*MFG. DATE*

45.3;17;0;0;*DESCRIPTION*

49.3;17;0;0;*INTERFACE*

49.3;50;0;0;*VERSION*

C13;31;16;0;0;*FROM:*

C15;54;26;0;0;*Call ACME MOTOR for more information.*

C15;55;34;0;0;*(714)863-1900*

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;PRACTICE

~NORMAL

Note

Remember, a blank line must always separate the

EXECUTE and NORMAL commands.

Notice that the END, EXECUTE;PRACTICE and NORMAL statements are

still in the file. These are always necessary to end the storage of the form in

the IGP and cause it to print. Print the file PRACTC.FRM. The PRACTICE

form should look like Figure 52, except for any alphanumeric data

substitutions you made. Again, if error messages occur, refer to “Solving

Program Errors” on page 248.

232

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adding a Bar Code

COLUMN 16

COLUMN 22

ROW 31

ROW 32

ROW 33

ROW 35.9

COLUMN 50

COLUMN 17

ROW 40.3

ROW 45.3

ROW 49.3

ROW 54

ROW 55

COLUMN 26

COLUMN 34

Figure 52. Practice Form Example

Adding a Bar Code

11. Change the form definition by adding bar code type Code 39 (C3/9), one

of the codes available on the IGP. First, reopen the file. Bar codes are

defined in the Create Form mode; therefore, the Bar Code command

must be entered before the End command line. In the Bar Code

command, specify type C3/9 and 0.8 inch height (Hn). Use a dynamic bar

code data field (BF) identified by the number (n) 1 with a length (L) of 5.

The actual data will be provided dynamically in the Execute Form mode.

Specify the starting row (SR) 35.7 and starting column (SC) 39, and stop

the command.

Enter

BARCODE

C3/9;H8;BF1;5;DARK;35.7;39

STOP

Format

BARCODE

C3/9[CD];[VSCAN;][MAG;][Hn;][BFn;L;][DARK;]SR;SC

[(D)data field(D)]

[PDF[;LOC][;FONT]]

STOP

233

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Exercise

12. To dynamically input alphanumeric data fields, first identify the locations

for the data in the Create Form mode as part of the form definition. Enter

the locations in the existing Alpha command sequence (or use a new

Alpha command). In the Alpha command sequence, enter the

alphanumeric field (AF), the field number (n), length (L), starting row (SR)

and column (SC), and any vertical (VE) or horizontal (HE) expansion. To

enter this alphanumeric data in the existing Alpha command sequence,

the data must be entered before the existing Alpha command STOP line.

Enter

AF1;7;38.7;19.3;3;3

AF2;11;43;20;2;2

AF3;31;47.3;20;2;1

AF4;33;51.3;20;2;1

Format

ALPHA (previously input)

[R;][E;][Cn;][AFn;L;][DIR;][UC;]SR;SC;VE;HE;(D)Text(D)

STOP (previously input)

13. Supply the dynamic data during the Execute Form mode (following the

EXECUTE;PRACTICE line). Use the SFCC, specify the dynamic

alphanumeric field (AF), bar code field (BF), the field number

(corresponding to those just entered in the form definition), and the data

itself. This method can be repeated to supply new data to each form

printed by separating the pages of data with a form feed. Refer to

“Execute Form: Dynamic Alphanumeric Data” on page 62.

Enter

Format

~AF1;*49114*

~AF2;*106772-902*

(cc)AFn;(D)data(D)

~AF3;*INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS PROCESSOR*

~AF4;*PARALLEL - CENTRONICS*

~BF1;*49114*

(cc)BFn;(D)data(D)

14. Now the PRACTC.FRM file contains all the following information (the

complete form program). Print the form by printing the file. The completed

form is shown in Figure 53.

~CREATE;PRACTICE

BOX

2;35;16;53;61

STOP

CORNER

3;30;13;57;64;5;7

STOP

HORZ

1;40;16;61

1;45;16;61

1;49;16;61

STOP

VERT

1;49;40;45

1;49;49;53

STOP

ALPHA

31;22;0;0;*ACME MOTOR, INC.*

32;22;0;0;*17500 CARTWRIGHT ROAD*

33;22;0;0;*IRVINE, CA 92714*

35.9;17;0;0;*SERIAL NUMBER*

234

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Adding a Bar Code

40.3;17;0;0;*PART NUMBER*

40.3;50;0;0;*MFG. DATE*

45.3;17;0;0;*DESCRIPTION*

49.3;17;0;0;*INTERFACE*

49.3;50;0;0;*VERSION*

C13;31;16;0;0;*FROM:*

C15;54;26;0;0;*Call ACME MOTOR for more information.*

C15;55;34;0;0;*(714)863-1900*

AF1;7;38.7;19.3;3;3

AF2;11;43;20;2;2

AF3;31;47.3;20;2;1

AF4;33;51.3;20;2;1

STOP

BARCODE

C3/9;H8;BF1;5;DARK;35.7;39

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;PRACTICE

~AF1;*49114*

~AF2;*106772-902*

~AF3;*INTELLIGENT GRAPHICS PROCESSOR*

~AF4;*PARALLEL-CENTRONICS*

~BF1;*49114*

~NORMAL

COLUMN 39

COLUMN 19.3

ROW 35.7

ROW 38.7

ROW 43

ROW 47.3

ROW 51.3

practc2.ex

Figure 53. Completed Practice Form Example

235

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Logo Exercise

In this exercise, you will generate a logo. The following sample uses a hand

logo. Using dot scaling (discussed in detail on page 83) on an 8-1/2 x 11-inch

form, a hand was drawn on a grid, with each dot tabulated by row and column

position. If a grid coordinate occupies half or more of a dot position, include

that position in your logo program. (Grid samples are located in Appendix B.)

Each dot position used must be identified individually. However, you can use

a hyphen between the starting and ending columns to indicate a section of

consecutive dots. For example, this hand logo requires dots in row 1, columns

40-42, shown in Figure 54. A sequential row order is not required.

A logo is created and stored as an element in the definition of a form. For

example, to use a logo, first design it in the Create Logo mode; then add it to

a form in the Create Form mode; then execute the form (with the logo) in the

Execute Form mode. The following logo exercise includes all three of these

steps.

DOT POSITIONS

Row

Column

40-42

35-42

36-42

35-42

33-41

31-40

30-38

29-36

Row

Column

1-36

1-39

1-58

1-57

4-24

7-23

8-23

9-23

11-24

12-25

14-27

15-30

17-32

18-35

22-34

25-35

26-36

28-37

30-37

32-37

33-37

35-36

28-35

27-34;52-54

24-33;48-54

22-31;45-54

19-30;41-54

16-29;38-53

13-29;36-51

11-29;33-48

9-44

7-42

6-39

4-36

1-34

1-60

1-59

1-35

Figure 54. Sample Logo

236

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a Logo

1. Use your system commands to open a file for the logo program with the

filename HNDLGO.FOM. For example:

Enter

Format

HNDLGO.FOM

(System Format)

2. Input the Special Function Control Character and Logo mode command

to put the IGP in the Create Logo mode. Include HAND as the logo name;

specify a vertical length (VL) of 56 (column length) and a horizontal length

(HL) of 60 (row length).

Enter

Format

~LOGO;HAND;56;60

(cc)LOGO;logoname;VL;HL

3. Enter each row of dot positions as tabulated from the grid and shown in

Figure 54. The format is Row;Column (for example, 15;13-29;36-51).

Each row is entered on a separate line. After all the dot positions are

entered, terminate the Create Logo mode by entering an End command

line.

4. Use the Special Function Control Character and Create command to

create a form with the form name LEFTHAND. To add the logo to the

form, input a Create Form mode Logo Call command, identify the logo

starting row (SR) 45 and starting column (SC) 33, and specify the logo to

use by its name (HAND). Stop the Logo command and end the Create

Form mode.

Enter

Format

~CREATE;LEFTHAND

LOGO

(cc)CREATE;[/]formname[;FL]

LOGO

45;33;HAND

STOP

SR;SC;logoname

STOP

END

5. Input the Special Function Control Character and Execute command for

the LEFTHAND form just created. Input a blank line, the Special Function

Control Character, and the Normal command to instruct the IGP to return

to the Normal mode after execution.

Enter

Format

~EXECUTE;LEFTHAND

(cc)EXECUTE;formname[;PAGE n]

[;FC]

~NORMAL

(cc)NORMAL

6. Use system commands to exit the HNDLGO.FOM file and print. The

finished program and logo should look like the following sample. If error

messages occur, refer to “Solving Program Errors” on page 248.

~LOGO;HAND;56;60

1;40-42

2;38-42

3;36-42

4;35-42

5;33-41

6;31-40

7;30-38

8;29-36

9;28-35

237

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Logo Exercise

10;27-34;52-54

11;24-33;48-54

12;22-31;45-54

13;19-30;41-54

14;16-29;38-53

15;13-29;36-51

16;11-29;33-48

17;9-44

18;7-42

19;6-39

20;4-36

21;1-34

22;1-34

23;1-34

24;1-60

25;1-60

26;1-60

27;1-60

28;1-59

29;1-59

30;1-35

31;1-36

32;1-39

33;1-58

34;1-58

35;1-58

36;1-58

37;1-58

38;1-57

39;4-24

40;7-23

41;8-23

42;9-23

43;11-24

44;12-25

45;14-27

46;15-30

47;17-32

48;18-33

49;22-34

50;25-35

51;26-36

52;28-37

53;30-37

54;32-37

55;33-37

56;35-36

END

ROW 45

~CREATE;LEFTHAND

HANDLOGO.EX

LOGO

45;33;HAND

COLUMN 33

STOP

END

~EXECUTE;LEFTHAND

~NORMAL

238

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Page Layout Considerations

Form Design

In this exercise, you will produce a complete form by sketching it out on a grid

in the same way the logo was designed. Again, this exercise uses character

scaling on an 8-1/2 x 11-inch (60 x 72 dpi) page. Refer to page 83, where

character scaling is discussed in detail.

Page Layout Considerations

At 6 lines per inch (lpi) and 10 characters per inch (cpi) printing, a standard 8-

1/2 x 11-inch sheet of paper has a print area of 66 lines (rows) and 85

characters (columns). The printable area will vary if you are not printing at 6

lpi and 10 cpi. Thus, the grid used to design an 8-1/2 x 11-inch form should

accommodate this 66 x 85 area.

Using the grids provided in Appendix B, sketch out the form layout and

identify the starting and ending values. These values will be used to input IGP

command parameters.

Planning the Form Layout

In this example, assume you work for the HandCraft Boat Company. Your

slogan is “Quality boats crafted by hand,” and the owner, Mr. Handcraft, has

asked you to design a simple form that his salespeople can use for special

orders. On the form, he wants a logo, the slogan, the customer's name,

spaces for other particulars of the order, and a bar code to distinguish the

sales region and boat division from other HandCraft enterprises. Begin this

task as described below.

1. First design the form on the Standard Grid provided in Appendix B. Figure

55 shows the locations of the various form components. Compensate for

expanded characters and plan for the logo.

2. Define the logo and then return to the form to add all the form

components. Modify the hand logo already on file as the HandCraft logo.

Use the Logo Grid in Appendix B, and refer to Figure 56 on page 242,

which shows the dot positions of the hand logo with a boat added to the

hand. When dot positions (or a range of dot positions) are not specified,

the boat image in the hand emerges.

3. Open a file named HNDCFT.FOM to contain all the form information. As

shown in the following example, use the Create Logo mode command,

name the logo HANDCRFT, specify the logo height (VL) and width (HL),

enter the dot positions used, and end the Logo command.

Enter

Format

HNDCFT.FOM

~LOGO;HANDCRFT;56;60

1;40-42

(System Format)

(cc)LOGO;logoname;VL;HL

row#;dot;dot1-dot2;dot

2;38-42

3;36-42

4;35-42

5;33-41

6;31-40

239

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Design

7;30-38

8;29-36

9;28-35

10;27-34;52-54

11;24-33;48-54

12;22-31;45-54

13;19-30;41-54

14;16-29;38-53

15;13-17;19-29;36-51

16;11-17;20-29;33-48

17;9-17;21-44

18;7-17;22-42

19;6-17;22-39

20;4-17;23-36

21;1-17;24-34

22;1-17;25-34

23;1-17;26-34

24;1-17;27-60

25;1-17;28-60

26;1-17;29-60

27;1-17;30-60

28;1-17;31-59

29;1-17;19-59

30;1-17;19-35

31;1-4;33-36

32;1-5;33-39

33;1-6;33-58

34;1-7;33-58

35;1-58

36;1-58

37;1-58

38;1-57

39;4-24

40;7-23

41;8-23

42;9-23

43;11-24

44;12-25

45;14-27

46;15-30

47;17-32

48;18-33

49;22-34

50;25-35

51;26-36

52;28-37

53;30-37

54;32-37

55;33-37

56;35-36

END

240

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Planning the Form Layout

Figure 55. Sample Form Design

241

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Design

Figure 56. Logo Design

242

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a Form and Adding Form Components

4. Create the form and start adding the form components from the layout

grid. (Refer to Figure 55 on page 241.) Use the Special Function Control

Character and Create command to define a form named HCBOATS. Use

the Box command to define the outer border with a line thickness (LT) 3,

top left corner at row (SR) 11 column (SC) 10, and bottom right corner at

row (ER) 55, column (EC) 70. In the same Box command sequence,

define another box with a line thickness of 2, top left corner at row 28

column 14, and bottom right corner at row 44.9 column 66. After defining

the boxes, stop the Box command.

Enter

Format

~CREATE;HCBOATS

BOX

(cc)CREATE;[/]formname[;FL]

BOX

3;11;10;55;70

2;28;14;44.9;66

STOP

LT;SR;SC;ER;EC

STOP

5. Mr. Handcraft would like corners around the slogan. Use the Corner

command to define a line thickness (LT) of 2, top left corner at row (SR)

48 column (SC) 24, and bottom right corner at row (ER) 52 column (EC)

56. Make the vertical (VL) corner piece 4 spaces long and the horizontal

(HL) corner piece 5 spaces long. Then stop the Corner command.

Enter

Format

CORNER

2;48;24;52;56;4;5

STOP

CORNER

LT;SR;SC;ER;EC;VL;HL

STOP

6. To make the columns for the special order items, add two vertical lines

each with a line thickness (LT) of 1, one line in column (C) 22 and the

other line in column 58. Each line will start at row (SR) 28 and end at row

(ER) 44.9.

Enter

Format

VERT

1;22;28;44.9

1;58;28;44.9

STOP

LT;C;SR;ER

STOP

7. To add the horizontal lines, define one line and then duplicate that line

using the Vertical Duplication command. The line will have a single line

thickness (LT), be in row (R) 30.4, starting in column (SC) 14 and ending

in column (EC) 66. With vertical duplication, the line will be duplicated

(dup #) 6 times with 2.5 row offset (offset #) spacing between each

duplication. The Vertical Duplication command must be input, the

horizontal line being duplicated must be input, and the Vertical

Duplication command must be turned off.

Enter

Format

VDUP;6;2.5

HORZ

VDUP;dup#;offset#

HORZ

1;30.4;14;66

STOP

LT;R;SC;EC

STOP

VDUP;OFF

243

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Design

8. All the text shown on the grid is fixed into position on the form with a

single Alpha command sequence. The starting row, starting column, and

text can be taken right from the grid and put into the program.

Enter

ALPHA

14;31;3;2;*HandCraft Boats*

18;14;0;0;*CUSTOMER:*

18;51;0;0;*PHONE:*

20;14;0;0;*HULL NO:*

20;49;0;0;*RIGGING:*

22;14;0;0;*COLOR:*

22;43;0;0;*DELIVERY DATE:*

25;31;1;1;*SPECIAL ORDER ITEMS*

27;17;0;0;*ITEM*

27;34;0;0;*DESCRIPTION*

27;60;0;0;*PRICE*

50;26;1;1;*Quality Boats Crafted By Hand*

C17;48;14;0;0;*HandCraft Boats*

C17;48.10;14;0;0;*123 Boat Way*

C17;49.8;14;0;0;*Boat Town, CA*

C17;50.6;19;0;0;*333444*

C17;51.4;14;0;0;*(714)555-0011*

STOP

Format

ALPHA

[R;][E;][Cn;][AFn;L;][DIR;][UC;][DARK;]SR;SC;VE;HE;(D)text(D)

STOP

9. HandCraft Boats uses bar code type Code 128B (C128B) in many

applications. Use bar code C128B, height (Hn) of .5-inch, starting at row

(SR) 49, column (SC) 59, code the West Coast Sales Region as *WC*,

and print the data field (PDF) below the symbol.

Enter

Format

BARCODE

C128B;H5;49;59

BARCODE

C128B;[VSCAN;][MAG;][Hn;][BFn;L;]

[DARK;]SR;SC

[(D)datafield(D)]

[PDF[;LOC][;FONT]]

STOP

*WC*

PDF

STOP

Note

The decimal point is not entered in the height parameter

(H5) above because values are expected in .10-inch

increments. Values from 4 through 99 (.4-inch to 9.9 inches)

are accepted.

244

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Creating a Form and Adding Form Components

10. Add the logo and end the Create Form mode. Use the Logo Call

command, specify the starting row (SR) at 12 and column (SC) at 18 as

shown on the grid and call the logo by name (HANDCRFT). The starting

row and column of the logo refer to the upper left corner of the grid used

in the logo design.

Enter

Format

LOGO

12;18;HANDCRFT

STOP

SR;SC;logoname

STOP

END

11. Execute the form (HCBOATS), return to the Normal mode (remember the

blank line before the NORMAL command), exit the file using your system

commands (if necessary), and print the document.

Enter

Format

~EXECUTE;HCBOATS

(cc)EXECUTE;formname[;PAGEn][;FC]

~NORMAL

(cc)NORMAL

.PRINT HNDCFT.FOM

(System Format)

Note

Always separate the EXECUTE and NORMAL commands

by a blank line.

Figure 57 shows the finished form. If Mr. Handcraft would like to rearrange the

words, change line thickness of a box, etc., simply open the file and change

the appropriate command lines. Otherwise, his salespeople have a new form

for notes on custom orders.

245

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Form Design

hcform.ex

Figure 57. Completed Sample Form

246

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

Directory Command

The Directory command lists the contents of the IGP directory in IGP memory.

The directory command provides the following information:

•

All form names and logo names currently defined

The association of logos to forms

The amount of memory used for form storage

The amount of dynamic storage space used and available

Example

A form will not execute unless enough room exists in the memory as indicated

in the work space bytes free portion of the directory listing. To print the

directory, open a file, input the directory command, exit the file, and print. For

example:

Enter

Format

DIRECT.FOM

~DIRECTORY

.PRINT DIRECT.FOM

(System Format)

(cc)DIRECTORY

(System Format)

The Directory command can only be used when the IGP is in the Normal

mode. Upon completion of the directory listing, the IGP returns to the Normal

mode. If the IGP is not in the Normal mode, input the Normal mode command

before the Directory command.

247

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Delete Command

The Delete command deletes any individual form or logo from the IGP

memory according to your specifications. The deletion of a form includes its

directory entry and any alphanumeric or vector information associated with it.

The Delete command is used only when the IGP is in the Normal mode.

Deletion of a logo includes its directory entry and its data in the logo storage

area. Deletion of a valid logo which is still combined with a form will not cause

an error at the time it is deleted; however, an error will occur if you execute a

form that contains a previously deleted logo.

Example

From the directory printed in the preceding section, delete the practice form,

the HandCraft Logo, and the HandCraft Boats form. Similar to the format used

with other command sequences, the procedure is as follows: open a file, input

the commands, exit the file, and print. For example:

Enter

Format

DELETE.FRM

~DELETE FORM;PRACTICE

~DELETE FORM;HCBOATS

(System Format)

(cc)DELETE FORM;formname

~DELETE LOGO;HANDCRFT (cc)DELETE LOGO;logoname

.PRINT DELETE.FRM (System Format)

Note

List the directory again to verify that the forms and logos

were deleted.

A form cannot execute if insufficient space exists in the IGP memory. The

directory Dynamic Work Space Bytes Free must be greater than the total size

(in bytes) of the form. Delete older forms and/or logos to allow memory space

for new forms and logos, or include the Delete command as the last statement

in a logo or form program to immediately delete the data after it is processed.

Creating a form (or logo) with the same name as an existing IGP form (or

logo) will automatically delete the existing form (or logo).

Solving Program Errors

If you make an error in the program to create a form or an element in the form,

a coded error message and program line containing the error will print when

the form is executed. These error codes are defined in the “Error Codes”

chapter.

To solve program errors, perform the following steps:

1. Locate the error message in the listing provided in the “Error Codes”

chapter for a description of the error.

2. Analyze the related portion of the program to find the error.

3. Correct the error and reprint the file containing the program.

248

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Example

4. If the error persists or you cannot locate it in the program, use the debug

parameter [/] in the Create command as described in the “Error Codes”

chapter. Print the file with the IGP program. The debug parameter lists the

program, line by line (including the error on the line where the error

occurs), followed by the error-free sections of the form. Correct the error

and print the file again. When the error has been corrected, delete the

debug parameter.

Example

Assume you made two errors in the Box and Corner commands input in steps

3 and 4 of the Form and Bar Code Example on page 229. Using the debug

parameter in the Create command produces the following sample listing:

(SFCC) CREATE; /PRACTICE

BOX

2;35;16:53;61

*** ERROR 24 : BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters

STOP

CORNER

3;300;13;57;64;5;7

*** ERROR 35 : CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds

*** ERROR 31 : CORNER starting row SR out of bounds

*** ERROR 39 : CORNER starting row SR > ending row ER

STOP

END

From the description of the error messages and the incorrect line identified by

the error message, the errors are easily located and corrected. Notice a colon

was accidentally input in the Box command where a semicolon was required

(error number 24).

/PRACTICE

BOX

2;35;16:53;61

*** ERROR 24 : BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters

STOP

In the Corner command, the starting row was too large. This single input error

caused the vertical length of the corner to extend beyond the form boundaries

(error number 35), the starting row to begin outside the form boundaries (error

number 31), and the starting/ending row parameters to be out of order (error

number 39).

CORNER

3;300;13;57;64;5;7

*** ERROR 35 : CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds

*** ERROR 31 : CORNER starting row SR out of bounds

*** ERROR 39 : CORNER starting row SR > ending row ER

STOP

END

249

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Solving Program Errors

250

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multinational Character

Sets

Introduction

The Multinational Character Set accesses one of many international character

sets. Each character set is 96 characters long and can be accessed by

configuration selection or IGP command. Individual characters in the font can

be accessed with the use of data bit 8.

Supported Character Sets

The Multinational Character Set provides the IGP/PGL with space for 32

character sets, 96 characters each. The character sets and their

corresponding set values are listed in Table 21.

Table 21. Multinational Character Sets and Set Values

Character Set

US ASCII

Value

Character Set

Dutch

Value

German

Swedish

Danish

French

Spanish

Italian

Norwegian

Finnish

Turkish

Reserved

User-Defined Sets

12-23

24-31

English

Standard PGL sets 0 through 11 are resident character sets. Sets 12 through

23 are reserved spaces in font memory for future resident character sets. If a

value from 12 through 23 is called when attempting to choose a character set,

the character font will default to ASCII. Character set values 24 through 31

are reserved for user-defined sets. You can create custom character sets

from existing characters in font memory. If you select a set value from 24 to

31 when no new character set has been created or assigned that value, the

character font will default to ASCII.

Refer to page 257 for printouts of the primary and extended character sets

and their corresponding values.

251

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Introduction

Character Addresses

Both the ASCII and multinational character sets have hex values for each

character and symbol. The primary character set (ASCII characters) resides

at hex addresses ranging from 00 to 7F. The extended character set, which

contains the multinational characters, resides at hex addresses ranging from

80 to FF. Table 22 shows each multinational character substitution hex value

and the applicable ASCII hex values. To access the extended character set,

the IGP must be configured with the data bit 8 option enabled.

Making Character Substitutions

Multinational character sets are created by substituting the multinational

character values for the standard ASCII values. Each of the 12 multinational

character sets allows up to 16 character substitutions (located at 21, 22, 23,

24, 25, 26, 40, 5B, 5C, 5D, 5E, 60, 7B, 7C, 7D, and 7E hex). The most

common character substitutions specific to a particular country are provided

in each set and shown in Table 22.

For example, when the Danish character set is selected, calling character

address cell 5B (Æ) substitutes the Danish character residing at C6 from the

Multinational Character Set. When the Spanish character set is selected,

calling character address cell 7C(ñ) substitutes the Spanish character

residing at F1 from the Multinational Character Set. These substitutions are

automatically performed when a particular Multinational Character Set is

selected./

Table 22. Substitution Set Hex Values

Substitution Hex Value

Character Set

U.S. ASCII

Danish

Dutch

English

Finnish

French

German

Italian

Norwegian

Spanish

Swedish

Turkish

DC E9

DC 87

252

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

OCR Character Sets

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

OCR Character Sets

Purpose Accesses OCR-A and OCR-B character sets.

Mode

CREATE, NORMAL and EXECUTE

See Comments

Format

Comments In the Create mode, you can access OCR fonts using the

alphanumeric command. Use the Cn parameter in the ALPHA

command. See page 29 for more information. In the Normal and

Execute modes, you can access OCR fonts using the

Compressed Print (Density) command (page 45).

Note

OCR fonts are only available in 10 cpi.

Data Bit 8

You can access individual characters using data bit 8 addressing. The

primary character set is ASCII. These character values reside at hex

addresses 20 through 7F. The multinational or extended character sets reside

at hex addresses 80 through FF and are accessible without reconfiguration.

Note

Data bit 8 must be set high so that multinational or extended

character sets are accessible without reconfiguration.

However, the PION/PIOFF command (page 79) must also

be set OFF to access these character sets in the 80-FF hex

range. A PION setting will cause data in the 80-FF hex

range to be interpreted as PI line data instead of extended

character set data.

Power-Up Character Set Selection

You can select any one of the twelve resident multinational character sets

shown in Table 21 (0 through 11) as the default character set at printer power-

up. The IGP configuration settings determine which character set is the

default character set at power-up.

The character font selected at power-up will remain active until the ISET

command is selected or the configuration is changed. OCR and user-

definable character sets cannot be configured as the default character set at

printer power-up.

253

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

User-Defined Set Command (USET)

Purpose Creates custom character sets (except OCR fonts) from existing

characters stored in memory.

Mode

NORMAL

Format

(cc)USET n

ca;fa

END

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control

Character.

USET

The User Set command; enter USET.

Selects USET character set number; enter a value

ranging from 1 through 8.

Represents the ASCII character cell hex address

which will have its contents replaced with the

character located in the font address (fa). The ca

value must be one of the 16 hex values specified in

Table 23 on page 255.

Represents the hexadecimal value for the font

address of a specified character in the Multinational

character set which will replace the current

contents of ca. The fa value is the character

substitution for the cell address (ca). The value of

fa may range from 20 through FF hex.

END

Ends the USET command.

Comments You can define up to 16 character substitutions for each of the

eight user-definable character sets. It is not necessary to address

all 16 spaces available for character substitutions with a single

USET command.

The character sets in the USET command are numbered 1

through 8. The character set values in the Character Set

Selection (ISET) command (page 256) are numbered 24 through

31 and correspond to User Sets 1 through 8. The ISET command

accesses and prints that custom character set.

The USET and ISET commands are related as shown in Table

23. Therefore, ISET;24 selects the substitution set defined as

USET1, ISET;29 selects USET6, etc.

254

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

User-Defined Set Command (USET)

Table 23. USET-ISET Relationship

corresponds

USETn

ISET;n

n = 1

n = 2

n = 3

n = 4

n = 5

n = 6

n = 7

n = 8

n = 24

n = 25

n = 26

n = 27

n = 28

n = 29

n = 30

n = 31

Example The following example defines User Set 1 to contain the

Multinational font addresses B1 (±), A1 (¡), and BF (¿) at the hex

cell addresses 23, 24, and 25, respectively. Therefore, if ca = 23

and fa = B1, each time that cell address 23 is received, it will

select the character located at font address B1 (±).

~USET1

23;B1

24;A1

25;BF

END

User Set 1 now contains the following: the plus or minus sign ±

(B1 hex) in place of the number sign # (23 hex); the upside down

exclamation point ¡ (A1 hex) in place of the dollar sign $ (24 hex);

and the upside down question mark ¿ (BF hex) in place of the

percent sign % (25 hex). To print User Set 1, you must use the

ISET command discussed on page 256.

255

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

Character Set Selection Command (ISET)

Purpose Accesses one of the 32 multinational character sets from Table

21. Use this command to access a different character set from

the configured power-up default character set.

Mode

NORMAL, CREATE, and EXECUTE

Format

In Normal and Execute modes: (cc)ISET; n

In the Create mode (SFCC not required): ISET; n

(cc)

ISET

Represents the Special Function Control

Character.

The Multinational Character Set command; enter

ISET.

The character substitution set number; enter a

value from Table 21.

For example, refer to Table 23. If you want to use

the User Set 1 created in the example on page 255,

call ISET;24. Similarly, if you want User Set 5 that

you had previously defined, call ISET;28 to select

and print the User Set 5 substitution set.

Comments You can issue the ISET command as many times within a form as

needed. The character set selected will remain active until a new

character set is selected. If you choose an incorrect character set

value or make a syntax error, an error message will result. If a

value for n is not specified, an error message will print.

Using the ISET command in the Execute mode declares the

character set for use in conjunction with the dynamic data within

that Execute command. Fixed form data specified in the Create

mode is not affected by an ISET command in the Execute mode.

The character set selected will remain in effect until another

character set is selected.

256

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multinational Character Sets

IGP/PGL MULTINATIONAL Set

ASCII Set

GERMAN Set

257

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

SWEDISH Set

DANISH Set

NORWEGIAN Set

FINNISH Set

258

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multinational Character Sets

DUTCH Set

ENGLISH Set

FRENCH Set

SPANISH Set

259

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

Accessing Characters and Character Sets

ITALIAN Set

TURKISH Set

OCR-A Set

OCR-B Set

260

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Error Codes

IGP/PGL Emulation Error Codes

The IGP provides coded error messages to assist in “debugging” programs.

The printer will print an error message number and the program line which

contains the error when an error is detected. To help determine exactly where

the error occurred, use the following debug command sequence:

(CC)CREATE;/FORM NAME

The slash (/) places the IGP in a debug mode, and the program prints, line by

line, with the error number and message printed below the specific error in the

program. The error-free portions of the form will print following the program.

After correcting the error(s), print the file again. When the errors have been

corrected, delete the slash. A sample debug listing is shown in “Solving

Program Errors” on page 248.

In the Execute mode, that part of the form which was correctly defined and

stored during the Create mode will print, including any dynamic data and

overlay text which was accepted before the error occurred. Sections

containing errors must be corrected before storage in the Directory can take

place. Any error messages will print following the printed form, and

processing will continue in the Normal mode.

In the Create Form or Create Logo mode, any error messages will print first,

followed by that part of the form/logo which was correctly defined. Incorrectly

defined elements are excluded from the form/logo.

The error codes are broken down into categories. In each category, the

number preceding each error message is the actual error code reported by

the printer, and the error shown in bold is the error message printed.

261

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

IGP/PGL Emulation Error Codes

Horizontal Line Errors

HORiZontal line starting row SR out of bounds

The row specified by the second parameter in the horizontal line

command places the horizontal line outside the boundaries of the

form.

HORiZontal line starting column SC out of bounds

The left (starting) column of the horizontal line specified by the

third parameter in the horizontal line command places the

horizontal line outside the boundaries of the form.

HORiZontal line ending column EC out of bounds

The right (ending) column of the horizontal line specified by the

fourth parameter in the horizontal line command places the

horizontal line outside the boundaries of the form.

HORiZontal line format or delimiter error

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the

parameters of the horizontal line command. This error is usually

caused by one or more of the following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the

parameters.

Insufficient memory to store the HORiZontal line

No more room in the IGP memory exists for another horizontal

line. The rest of the horizontal line commands are flushed until

the Stop command is found. Processing will then continue

normally. To create space in the IGP memory, delete forms with

horizontal line elements that are no longer required.

HORiZontal line starting column SC > ending column EC

The left (starting) column parameter of the horizontal line

command is greater than or equal to the right (ending) column

parameter.

HORiZontal line thickness LT error

The thickness of the horizontal line specified by the first

parameter in the horizontal line command is incorrect. This error

is usually caused by specifying a thickness of zero.

08-09

Not defined.

262

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Line Errors

VERTical line starting column SC out of bounds

The column specified by the second parameter in the vertical line

command places the vertical line outside the form boundaries.

VERTical line starting row SR out of bounds

The upper (starting) row of the vertical line specified by the third

parameter in the vertical line command places the vertical line

outside the boundaries of the form.

VERTical line ending row ER out of bounds

The lower (ending) row of the vertical line specified by the fourth

parameter in the vertical line command places the vertical line

outside the boundaries of the form.

VERTical line format or delimiter error

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the

parameters of the vertical line command. This error is usually

caused by one or more of the following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the

parameters.

Insufficient memory to store the VERTical line

No more room in the IGP memory exists for another vertical line.

The rest of the vertical line commands are flushed until the Stop

command is found. Processing will then continue normally. To

create space in the IGP memory, delete forms with vertical line

elements that are no longer required.

VERTical line starting row SR > ending row ER

The upper (starting) row parameter of the vertical line command

is greater than or equal to the lower (ending) row parameter.

VERTical line thickness LT error

The thickness of the vertical line specified by the first parameter

in the vertical line command is incorrect. This error is usually

caused by specifying a thickness of zero.

17-19

Not defined.

263

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

IGP/PGL Emulation Error Codes

Box Errors

BOX starting column SC out of bounds

The left (starting) column specified by the third parameter in the

box command places the box outside the form boundaries.

BOX starting row SR out of bounds

The upper (starting) row of the box specified by the second

parameter in the box command will place the box outside the

boundaries of the form.

BOX ending column EC out of bounds

The right (ending) column specified by the fifth parameter in the

box command places the box outside the form boundaries.

BOX ending row ER out of bounds

The lower (ending) row of the box specified by the fourth

parameter in the box command will place the box outside the

boundaries of the form.

BOX format or delimiter error in input parameters

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the

parameters of the box command. This error is usually caused by

one or more of the following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the

parameters.

Insufficient memory to store the BOX

No more room in the IGP memory exists for another box. The rest

of the box commands are flushed until the Stop command is

found. Processing will then continue normally. To create space in

the IGP memory, delete forms with box elements that are no

longer required.

BOX starting column SC > ending column EC

The left (starting) column parameter of the box command is

greater than or equal to the right (ending) column parameter.

BOX starting row SR > ending row ER

The upper (starting) row parameter of the box command is

greater than or equal to the lower (ending) row parameter.

BOX line thickness LT error

The thickness of the box specified by the first parameter in the

box command is incorrect. This error is usually caused by

specifying a thickness of zero.

Not defined.

264

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Corner Errors

CORNER starting column SC out of bounds

The left (starting) column specified by the third parameter in the

corner command places the corner outside the form boundaries.

CORNER starting row SR out of bounds

The upper (starting) row of the corner specified by the second

parameter in the corner command will place the corner outside

the boundaries of the form.

CORNER ending column EC out of bounds

The right (ending) column specified by the fifth parameter in the

corner command places the corner outside the form boundaries.

CORNER ending row ER out of bounds

The lower (ending) row of the corner specified by the fourth

parameter in the corner command will place the corner outside

the boundaries of the form.

CORNER horizontal length HL out of bounds

The length of the horizontal arms of the corner specified by the

seventh parameter in the corner command will cause parts of the

corner to extend outside the form boundaries.

CORNER vertical length VL out of bounds

The length of the vertical arms of the corner specified by the sixth

parameter in the corner command will cause parts of the corner

to extend above or below the boundaries of the form.

CORNER format or delimiter error in input parameters

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the

parameters of the corner command. This error is usually caused

by one or more of the following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the

parameters.

Insufficient memory to store the CORNER

No more room in the IGP memory exists for another corner. The

rest of the corner commands are flushed until the Stop command

is found. Processing will then continue normally. To create space

in the IGP memory, delete forms with corner elements that are no

longer required.

CORNER starting column SC > ending column EC

The left (starting) column parameter of the corner command is

greater than or equal to the right (ending) column parameter.

CORNER starting row SR > ending row ER

The upper (starting) row parameter of the corner command is

greater than or equal to the lower (ending) row parameter.

265

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

IGP/PGL Emulation Error Codes

Alpha Errors

ALPHA leading and trailing delimiters mismatched

The leading delimiter (printable character) of the actual text string

was not matched with an ending delimiter before the line

terminator was found.

ALPHA starting row SR out of bounds

The starting row parameter in the Alpha command will cause the

text string to print either above or below the limits of the form.

Note

Expanded print text strings expand up from the specified

row. This could cause an attempt to print the text string

above the top of the form and generate the error message.

ALPHA starting column SC out of bounds

The starting column parameter in the Alpha command is either

extending the alpha string beyond the left margin of the form or

the starting column parameter, plus the actual length of the text is

extending the string beyond the right margin of the page.

ALPHA string length > 255 characters

The string contains more than 255 characters.

ALPHA format or delimiter error in input parameters

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the

parameters of the alpha command. This error is usually caused

by one or more of the following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the

parameters.

e. Delimiter found within text string.

Insufficient memory to store the ALPHA string

No more room in the IGP memory exists for another alpha string.

The rest of the Alpha commands are flushed until the Stop

command is found. Processing of the form will then continue

normally. To create space in the IGP memory, delete forms with

alpha string elements that are no longer required.

ALPHA X expansion HE and Y expansion VE must be zero

When the expanded character parameters VE and HE are used

within the ALPHA command, both values must be either zero or

non-zero values. If the elongated characters parameter (E) or the

compressed characters parameter (Cn) is used in the ALPHA

command, the VE and HE values must be set to 0.

ALPHA X expansion factor HE out of bounds (> 113)

The horizontal expansion factor is greater than 113.

ALPHA Y expansion factor VE out of bounds (> 113)

The vertical expansion factor is greater than 113.

266

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Logo Errors

ALPHA compression factor Cn error (10, 10A, 10B, 12, 13, 15,

17 or 20)

The optional compression parameter (Cn) which defines the

horizontal pitch of the text was specified incorrectly. The pitches

available are 10, 10A, 10B, 12, 13, 15, 17 and 20.

Logo Errors

LOGO horizontal width HL > 240 or dot col > HL

a. The horizontal width of the logo is equal to zero or greater than

240. The IGP automatically reverts to Normal mode when this

occurs.

b. A dot position specified in the logo program exceeds the

specified horizontal width of the logo. When this occurs, the

buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found, and then logo

construction continues normally.

LOGO vertical length VL > 252 or dot row n > VL

a. The vertical length of the logo is equal to zero or greater than

252. The IGP automatically reverts to Normal mode when this

occurs.

b. A dot row specified in the logo program exceeds the specified

vertical length of the logo. When this occurs, the buffer is flushed

until a line terminator is found, and then logo construction

continues normally.

LOGO hyphen syntax error in input parameters

The beginning or ending dots are out of order, or a parameter is

missing. The buffer is flushed until a line terminator is found, and

then logo construction continues normally.

Insufficient memory to create the LOGO

No more room exists in IGP memory to construct a logo for the

size specified. When this occurs, the IGP reverts to Normal

mode. To create space in IGP memory, delete forms with logo

elements (including the logos) that are no longer required.

LOGO format or delimiter error

Some type of format or delimiter error was detected in the Logo

command. If this occurs while specifying the size and name of the

logo, the IGP reverts to the Normal mode. If this occurs during the

actual construction of the logo, the buffer is flushed until a line

terminator is found, and then logo construction continues

normally.

LOGO call not previously defined

An attempt was made in the Create Form mode to incorporate an

undefined logo into a form. This error is not generated during the

Logo Form mode. When this error occurs, the buffer is flushed

until a line terminator is found, and then forms creation continues

normally.

267

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

IGP/PGL Emulation Error Codes

Insufficient memory for another LOGO call

IGP memory cannot store another logo call. To create space in

the IGP memory, delete forms with logo elements (including the

logos) no longer required.

LOGO call starting row SR out of bounds

During form creation, the parameter specifying the row position of

a logo places the logo outside the form boundaries. The buffer is

flushed until a line terminator is found, and then processing

continues normally.

LOGO call starting column SC out of bounds

During form creation, the parameter specifying the column

position of a logo places the logo outside the form boundaries.

When this occurs, the buffer is flushed until a line terminator is

found, and then processing continues normally.

Color or GRAY scale not supported with LOGOS

Color or gray information was received from the TIFF data, but it

is not supported with the LOGO command.

Create Errors

Directory full - cannot CREATE the form or LOGO

The directory is full, or no more room exists in the IGP memory

for another form. When this occurs, the IGP automatically reverts

to the Normal mode. To create space in the IGP memory, delete

forms that are no longer required.

CREATE function unrecognized

An unrecognizable command is entered during the Create Form

mode. At this point, the buffer is flushed until a Stop command is

found, and then processing continues.

CREATE horizontal duplication parameter HDUP error

Either a format error was detected or a parameter was exceeded.

The duplication number must be no greater than 255, and the

offset must be no greater than 792 (dot scale). If this error occurs,

the Horizontal Duplication command is ignored, and forms

processing continues.

CREATE vertical duplication parameter VDUP error

Either a format error was detected, or a parameter was

exceeded. The duplication number must be no greater than 255

and the offset must be no greater than the specified length of the

form. If this error occurs, the Vertical Duplication command is

ignored, and forms processing continues.

CREATE scale factor parameter SCALE invalid

Either a format error was detected, or a parameter was specified

incorrectly. The vertical lines per inch can be specified as follows;

6, 8, 9, or 10. The horizontal characters per inch can be specified

only as 10, 12, 13, 15, 17 or 20 cpi. If this error occurs, the Scale

command is ignored and forms processing continues.

268

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Execute Errors

CREATE page starting row PAGE SR out of bounds

When you specify the position of the page parameters with the

Page command in the Create Form mode, the row position

specified will place the page number above or below the

boundaries of the form. When this error occurs, the IGP will

automatically revert to the Normal mode.

CREATE page starting column PAGE SC out of bounds

When you specify the position of the page parameters in the

Create command, the column position specified will place the

page number outside the form boundaries. When this error

occurs, the IGP will automatically revert to the Normal mode.

CREATE STOP command missing

This error occurs when the IGP receives a new function

command, an End command, or a mode command without

receiving a Stop command. The IGP will continue to process

subsequent commands correctly.

Insufficient memory to store the SETUP program

No more room in the IGP/PGL memory exists for storing the

SETUP routine.

Insufficient memory to store the form

The directory is full, or no more room exists in the IGP memory

for another form. When this occurs, the IGP automatically reverts

to the Normal mode. To create space in the IGP memory, delete

forms that are no longer required.

Execute Errors

EXECUTE form count parameter FC error

This error occurs when the parameter specifying the number of

blank forms to print was entered incorrectly. When this error

occurs, the IGP will automatically revert to the Normal mode.

Form count can be from 1 through 65,535.

EXECUTE/DELETE form not found in the directory

An attempt was made to execute or delete a form which does not

exist in the forms directory. When this error occurs, the IGP

reverts to the Normal mode.

EXECUTE EVFU load error

This error is generated only during the Execute Form mode while

programming the EVFU. If more channels than lines per physical

page are specified during a load sequence, this error is

generated, and the IGP reverts to the Normal mode.

EXECUTE EVFU terminator invalid

This error is generated only during the Execute Form mode. The

EVFU LOAD is missing an END LOAD code. If the line terminator

cannot be deciphered, an error is generated, and the IGP reverts

to the Normal mode.

269

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

IGP/PGL Emulation Error Codes

Missing delimiter - must be a single quotation mark

When issuing an SFCC change command, the new SFCC

character must be contained within two single quotation marks. If

the new SFCC character is being identified by the ASCII value,

no quotation marks are required.

Not defined

EXECUTE page number error

An error was made while specifying the page number used with

the form being executed. This error can be generated because of

incorrect format or a page number that is too large. The specified

page number can range from 0 through 99,999,999. Since the

page number is part of the Execute command, the IGP will revert

to the Normal mode.

EXECUTE format or delimiter error

A format or delimiter error was detected in the Execute

command; the IGP will revert to the Normal mode. This error is

usually caused by one or more of the following:

a. A missing semicolon;

b. A colon in place of a semicolon;

c. Too many or too few parameters in the command string;

d. Alpha characters instead of numeric characters in the

parameters.

e. Page command misspelled when specifying the page number.

Insufficient memory to EXECUTE the form

Insufficient memory was available to recall and execute a form.

The IGP will automatically revert to the Normal mode.

Not defined.

Miscellaneous Errors

Special function must be called from the NORMAL mode

This special function must be called from the Normal mode and

not the Create Form or Execute Form mode. This error is

generally due to a missing End command in the Create Form

mode. For example, an attempt to enter the Create Form mode

while executing a form will cause the IGP automatically to revert

to the Normal mode.

No such special function

The special function call was unrecognizable. The IGP will

automatically revert to the Normal mode.

Numeric value expected in input parameter

Characters other than numeric digits (0-9) are encountered

where digits are expected.

Decimal input error in input parameter

The parameter expected was a decimal number. Either the

number was not there, or it was too large (greater than 65,535).

This error can also be caused by entering an alpha character

instead of a numeric character.

270

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Bar Code Errors

Missing or wrong delimiter - must be a semicolon ;

The delimiter is either wrong or missing. The delimiter expected is

a semicolon.

Missing or wrong delimiter - must be a colon :

The delimiter is either wrong or missing. The delimiter expected is

a colon.

DENSITY param error - 10, 10A, 10B, 12, 13, 15, 17 or 20

The parameters of the Density command are improperly

specified. The densities currently implemented are 10, 10A, 10B,

12, 13, 15, 17 and 20 characters per inch. The command is

ignored and processing continues.

LPI parameters error - must be 6, 8, 9, 10

The parameters of the LPI command are improperly specified.

The only parameters implemented are 6, 8, 9, and 10 lpi. The

command is ignored and processing continues.

Bar code type is not supported

The specified bar code type is either misspelled or not supported.

EXPAND parameters out of bounds or format error

The parameters of the Expand command are improperly

specified. Either the parameters are out of bounds, or some type

of format error was detected. The command is ignored, and

processing continues.

Bar Code Errors

Insufficient memory to store the BARCODE

No more room exists in the IGP memory for another bar code.

The rest of the bar code commands are flushed until the Stop

command is found. Then, processing continues.

ALPHA/BARCODE syntax error

Some type of syntax (format) error was detected in the

parameters of the bar code command. This error is usually

caused by one or more of the following:

a. Misspelled keywords;

b. Lowercase used;

c. A missing semicolon;

d. A colon in place of a semicolon;

e. An ending delimiter for the data field was not found;

f. Too many or too few parameters in the command string.

The rest of the command line is flushed until the Stop command

is found. Processing will then continue.

BARCODE magnification factor MAG out of bounds or not

allowed

The magnification factor specified in the bar code command is

out of bounds. Refer to the applicable section in the “Bar Codes”

chapter to determine the acceptable magnification values for the

bar code symbol being used.

271

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

IGP/PGL Emulation Error Codes

BARCODE starting row SR out of bounds

The starting row parameter in the bar code command will cause

the bar code symbol to print either above or below the limits of

the form.

BARCODE starting column SC out of bounds

The starting column parameter in the bar code command will

cause the bar code symbol to print either beyond the left margin

or the right margin of the form.

BARCODE height Hn out of bounds - must be 3 through 99

The height parameter specified in the bar code command is out

of bounds. Acceptable values are 3 through 99.

BARCODE data field has illegal character/format

A character in the data field was not recognized as an acceptable

character. Refer to the applicable section in the “Bar Codes”

chapter to determine the acceptable characters for the bar code

symbol being used. The missing ending delimiter also causes this

error.

BARCODE data field too short or too long

The data field in the bar code command has too few or too many

data characters. Refer to the applicable section in the “Bar

Codes” chapter to determine the acceptable number of data

characters for the bar code symbol being used.

BARCODE symbol(s) exceeds the form length

The bar code command causes a bar code symbol to print below

the limits of the form. This error occurs on the data field line of the

bar code.

BARCODE symbol(s) exceeds the form width

The bar code command causes a bar code symbol to print

beyond the right margin. This error occurs on the data field line of

the bar code.

100

101

BARCODE variable ratio 0 or not ascending.

For user-defined variable bar code ratios, either one of the ratios

is zero or else an incorrect number of ratios was specified.

BARCODE PDF not allowed or error - LOC: A or B - FONT: N,

O, X, S, P, Q, R, T or V

Either the alternate font was selected for a bar code or an invalid

parameter was used. Acceptable parameters must be “N” for the

normal font, “O” for the OCR-A optional font, “X” for the OCR-B

optional font, or “S” to suppress printing of the data field, “P” for

12 cpi, “Q” for 13 cpi, “R” for 15 cpi, “T” for 17 cpi, “V” for 20 cpi.

102

103

Dynamic BARCODE symbol exceeds the form length.

The dynamic bar code command causes a bar code symbol to

print below the limits of the form. This error occurs on the data

field line of the bar code.

Dynamic BARCODE symbol exceeds the form width

The bar code command with a dynamic data field exceeds the

limits of the current form width.

272

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Reverse Print Errors

104

105

Dynamic BARCODE data field BFn not previously defined

Dynamic data field designated in the Execute Form mode was

not defined in the Create Form mode.

Dynamic ALPHA/BARCODE field number AFn/BFn error -

must be 1-512

Dynamic alpha field number (AFn) or bar code field number (BFn)

must range from 1 through 512.

106

107

Not defined.

Dynamic ALPHA data field AFn not previously defined

The dynamic alpha field number called for was not previously

defined in the Create Form mode.

108

109

Not defined.

Dynamic ALPHA/BARCODE field longer than previously

defined

The BARCODE data provided exceeds the maximum length for

the bar code selected.

110

SFCC decimal input error - must be 1 - 255

The hexadecimal value on the ASCII chart for the Special

Function Control Character is not valid. Refer to page 86 to select

a valid SFCC.

Reverse Print Errors

111

112

113

114

REVERSE format error in input parameters

Re-enter the command with proper format.

REVERSE starting row SR/ending row ER out of bounds

Exceeds the value specified to reverse the element.

REVERSE starting SC/ending column EC out of bounds

Exceeds the value specified to reverse the element.

Insufficient memory to store the REVERSE element

Insufficient memory space available for reversed print

requirements.

115

PDF417 bar code sizing parameter illegal or too small for

data

116

PDF417 security level has illegal value or format

Unusable or illegal raster data.

Unsupported raster image type.

Unsupported raster compression type.

Not defined.

117

118

119

120-121

122

EXECUTE form too wide for current page setting

The form was defined in one orientation while sent to print in

another orientation. Use the debug slash (/) when creating a form

to show which element is out of bounds (see page 314).

273

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

IGP/PGL Emulation Error Codes

123

EXECUTE form too long for current page setting

The form was defined in one orientation while sent to print in

another orientation. Use the debug slash (/) when creating a form

to show which element is out of bounds.

124-125

126

Not defined.

LFORMx form length parameter n error

The number of lines exceeds 66 (for 6 lpi) or 88 (for 8 lpi) lines

when using the LFORMx command.

127

128

Not defined.

FORM/LOGO name is not a legal file name

The file name exceeds the fifteen-character limitation, or an

invalid character was used in the file name. Refer to IGP

Command Standards in the “Commands” chapter.

129

Not defined.

Incremental Fields Errors

130

131

Not defined.

Incremental STEPMASK parameter error

A semicolon is missing after the STEPMASK data.

132

Incremental REPEAT/RESET parameter error

An illegal RPT or RST parameter value was found in the

incremental command. The value must range from 1 through

65,535.

133

134

Incremental STEPMASK/STARTDATA length error

The dynamic stepmask exceeded created field length or start

data exceeded stepmask.

Incremental EXECUTE command error

An illegal IRST or ICNT parameter value was found in the

Execute command. The value must range from 1 through 65,535.

135

136

Not defined.

Incremental STEPMASK/STARTDATA mismatched

The STARTDATA value must be A-Z or 0-9, when the

STEPMASK value is a value from 0-9.

Multinational Character Set Errors

150

ISET character selection parameter n error

An ISET character set selection parameter value was expected.

Error was caused possibly by an invalid numeric value or an

alpha character. See Chapter 5.

151

152

USET decimal input error in input parameter

The USET command was expecting a decimal parameter and

either received none or received an alpha character.

USET character set n parameter error

A USET character set selection parameter value between 1 and 8

274

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Multinational Character Set Errors

was expected. Error was caused possibly by an invalid numeric

value or an alpha character.

153

USET substituted character illegal - must be 1 of 16

During character substitution in the USET command, the hex

value for the character being replaced must be one of the

specified 16 hex values. Only the following hex values (Ca) can

be replaced by another hex value (Fa): 21, 22, 23, 24, 25, 26, 40,

5B, 5C, 5D, 5E, 60, 7B, 7C, 7D, 7E.

154

155

USET defined character illegal - must be hex 20-FF

During the USET command, the hex value for the substituted

character (Fa) must range between 20 and FF hex. The value

given may be out of bounds.

USET syntax error - END command is expected

An END command is expected when the USET character set

definition is completed.

156

157

No such CONFIGuration option

Left or Top/Bottom margin too large for the current page

size.

158-159

Not defined.

275

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Chapter

IGP/PGL Emulation Error Codes

276

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Standard ASCII Character

Set

BITS

B4 B3 B2 B1

KEY

OCTAL

DECIMAL

HEX

ESC

ASCII CHARACTER

BITS

COLUMN

B4 B3 B2 B1

ROW

100

120

140

160

112

0 0

NUL

SOH

DLE

101

121

141

161

DC1

113

0 0

(XON)

102

122

142

162

114

DC2

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

103

123

143

163

115

DC3

0 0

(XOFF)

104

124

144

100

164

116

DC4

NAK

SYN

0 1

1 0

105

125

145

101

165

117

106

126

146

102

166

118

’

107

127

147

103

167

119

ETB 23

110

130

150

104

170

120

CAN

(

)

[

{

111

131

151

105

171

121

1 0

EM 25

0 A

112

132

152

106

172

122

1 0

SUB

113

133

153

173

ESC

;

0 B

107

123

0 C

114

134

154

108

174

124

1 1

115

135

155

175

]

}

0 D

109

125

0 E

116

136

156

110

176

126

1 1

0 F

117

137

157

111

177

127

DEL

277

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix A

278

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Grid Programs and

Samples

The Standard Grid. The standard grid is used for form design. The program

for the standard grid is listed below, and a sample of the standard grid follows

on the next page. Photocopy the grid provided or enter the grid program and

make your own printout.

279

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

The Logo Grid. The program for a logo grid is listed below and the sample

grid follows. It is not the full size logo grid; the grid can measure up to 240

columns wide by 252 rows high for a logo 4 x 3.5 inches. Photocopy the grid

or enter the grid program to obtain a printout.

281

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Vertical Paper Motion

Introduction

There are three methods of advancing the print position with the IGP which

are explained in this appendix:

1. Using line feeds or form feeds;

2. Using the paper instruction (PI) line; or

3. Using the Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU).

Paper Motion Using Line Feeds and Form Feeds

The most common method of advancing the print position with IGP is through

the use of line feeds and form feeds. A line feed moves the print position

down a distance determined by the current line spacing (lpi). In the Normal

mode, a form feed character advances the print position to the top of the next

page; in the Execute mode, a form feed advances the print position to the top

of the next form. Form length is determined by the CREATE command.

Paper Motion Using the PI Line (Relative Line Slewing)

The method of moving the print position using the PI line results in vertical

slews of a specified number of lines relative to the current print position

(rather than slewing to a specific line). For this to occur, the following criteria

must be met:

1. The PI line must be enabled and set high; and

2. Data bit 5 must be 1 (set).

When a number of blank lines will be skipped on a form, (called “paper

slewing”) another method of paper motion may be used. The PI signal can be

detected by the IGP as the 8th data bit in a serial interface, or a separate input

line in a parallel interface. (Refer to the EN-PI/DIS-PI command and the

PION/PIOFF commands on page 79.) When the PI signal is used, bits 6 and 7

are interpreted as 0 values, and characters hex 10 through 1F are interpreted

as binary slew commands.

283

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C Paper Motion Using the PI Line (Relative Line Slewing)

The binary slew commands can skip from 1 through 15 or 1 through 16 lines

on the form, depending on how the Slew Range configuration option is

configured. Refer to Table 24 which illustrates how lines are skipped for each

value. (Note that the state of data bit 5 is the difference between line slewing

and using the interface lines as EVFU channel codes.) This type of vertical

paper motion occurs whenever the line slewing command is used regardless

of whether the EVFU memory is loaded or not.

Table 24. Line Space Slewing

Slew Range

Configuration Value

ASCII

Data Bits

Hex

Dec

Code

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUB

ESC

X = Undefined, 0 or 1

1 = High

0 = Low

Note

*The ASCII values in Table 24 assume that all undefined bits

are set to 0. When the PI line is enabled, data bit 8 is the PI

line on a serial interface, and data bit 8 is undefined on a

parallel interface.

284

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

General EVFU Programming

Paper Motion Using the EVFU

The Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU) is an efficient method of skipping

to a specified print position during repetitive printing tasks. The EVFU affects

the vertical placement of overlay data produced in the Execute Form mode.

General EVFU Programming

The general EVFU programming procedure is as follows:

1. Design a form, determining spacing and channel assignments for each

line.

2. Send the programming sequence to the printer.

The following information applies when programming and using the EVFU:

PI Line. The PI signal can be detected by the IGP as the 8th data bit in a

serial interface, or a separate input line in a parallel interface. (Refer to the

EN-PI/DIS-PI command and the PION/PIOFF commands on page 79.)

Elongated Characters. Elongated (double high) characters can be used

within EVFU programs. The EVFU automatically counts one line of elongated

characters as two normal character lines.

Paper Runaway Protection. If the EVFU is selected but not loaded when an

EVFU command is sent from the host computer, the printer moves the paper

a single line feed. If the EVFU is selected and the memory is loaded, a

channel code sent from the host, which is not a part of the assigned sequence

currently in memory, moves the paper a single line feed.

Line Spacing. The printer can use any line spacing with the EVFU. The

EVFU determines the forms length according to the program specifications

and the currently selected line spacing. For example, 14-inch paper with 10 lpi

line spacing would yield a 140-line form which can be defined by the EVFU.

Mixing line spacing on the same form unloads the EVFU.

EVFU Programming Sequence

The EVFU provides 16 channels to identify up through 192 lines. An error

results if the EVFU form length exceeds the physical length of the page, and

the IGP returns to the Normal mode. The number of channels in an EVFU

overrides the length of the form as it was defined in the CREATE mode;

therefore, the EVFU must be equal to or longer than the form being used.

The EVFU programming sequence is listed below and explained in the

following sections.

1. Start load code;

2. Line identification codes; and

3. End load code.

285

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C Paper Motion Using the EVFU

Start Load Code - 1E or 6E Hex

The Start Load code clears and initializes the EVFU memory for channel

assignment storage. Refer to Table 25 or Table 26 for the appropriate start

load code.

Channel Assignment

The EVFU memory has the capacity for 92-line forms. The first line

identification code (channel code) in the EVFU load data defines the first line

on the form; the second line identification code defines the second line on the

form, etc. Each line must have a line identification code.

A single channel code is used repeatedly throughout a form to reserve blank

lines between defined channel codes and to maintain the correct forms

length. These “filler” channels can be any channel number except channel

code 1 (which is reserved for the top-of-form) and channel code 12 (which is

reserved as the vertical tab channel). In the EVFU example which begins on

page 289, filler channels are represented by a hex 11 code. Calls are rarely

made to filler channels because they do not specify a unique print position on

the form.

Channel 1 — The top-of-form code, reserved as the first line on the form. The

operating program sends the channel 1 code to advance to the top of the next

form. After the memory is loaded, a Form Feed code (FF, 0C hex) moves the

paper to the next channel 1 (top-of-form).

Channels 2 through 11, 13 and 14 — Used as general channel codes (also

referred to as line identification codes) or as filler channels. Each line on the

form must be identified by a channel code. When the operating program

sends the channel code, the paper advances to the line identified by the

channel code.

Channel 12 — Reserved as the vertical tab channel. The vertical tab code

(VT, 0B hex) rapidly advances the print position to the next line identified by

the channel 12 code. If channel 12 is not loaded in the EVFU memory, a

single line feed is executed when a VT code is sent.

End Load - 1F or 6F Hex

The end load code terminates the channel storage and saves the EVFU in

memory. Refer to Table 25 or Table 26 for the appropriate end load code.

Channel codes in excess of 192 channels received prior to the end load code

cause an EXECUTE EVFU load error.

Using the EVFU

Sending the appropriate EVFU channel code to the printer causes any data in

the buffer to print and slew the paper to the next line on the form having the

specified channel number assigned in EVFU memory.

To recognize a data byte as an EVFU instruction, one of the following sets of

criteria must be met:

1. The PI line must be enabled and set high;

2. Bits 7 and 6 can be set to 1 or 0; and

286

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Using the EVFU

3. Data bit 5 must be 0 (not set).

OR:

1. The PI line must be disabled or low;

2. Bits 7 and 6 must be 0 (not set); and

3. Data bit 5 must be 1 (set).

Given these conditions, the lower four bits of a byte specify the EVFU channel

number. Table 25 lists the EVFU channels and their equivalent data bytes

when the PI line is enabled; Table 26 lists the EVFU channel and their

equivalent data bytes when the PI line is disabled.

Table 25. EVFU Codes — PI Line Enabled

ASCII

Data Bits

Channel

Hex

Dec

Code

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

1 (TOF)

12 (VT)

110

Start Load

End Load

111

X = Undefined, 0 or 1

1 = High

0 = Low

Note

*The ASCII values in Table 25 assume that all undefined bits

are set to 0. When the PI line is enabled, data bit 8 is the PI

line on a serial interface, and data bit 8 is undefined on a

parallel interface.

287

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C Paper Motion Using the EVFU

Table 26. EVFU Codes — PI Line Disabled or Not Used

ASCII

Data Bits

Channel

Hex

Dec

Code

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

1 (TOF)

SUB

ESC

12 (VT)

Start Load

End Load

0 = Low

X = Undefined, 0 or 1

1 = High

Note

Do not use your SFCC as a channel code when using the

EVFU.

Clearing the EVFU Memory

The following actions reset (clear) the EVFU memory:

1. Sending only the start load code.

2. Sending a start load code followed immediately by an end load code.

3. A second start load code is received, resulting in re-initialization of the

EVFU. (This restarts the EVFU load sequence.)

When the EVFU memory is cleared, the forms length returns to the previously

set value.

288

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EVFU Example

The following EVFU example is a 2-inch form at 6 lpi line spacing. Thus, 12

lines on the form must be defined. The form is repeated 3 times. Paper

instructions are disabled.

Assign Line Identification Codes

Line ID Code Description

Assigned Hex Code

Start Load

Line 1

Line 2

Line 3

Line 4

Line 5

Line 6

Line 7

Line 8

Start EVFU

Top of Form

Filler

Vertical Tab

First channel stop

Filler

Line 9

Second channel stop 12

Line 10

Line 11

Line 12

Stop Load

Filler

Third channel stop

Filler

End EVFU

EVFU Format in Execute Mode

The Execute command shown on the next page, derived from the Execute

command format on page 59, illustrates how the EVFU data above is

incorporated into the Execute command. All other Execute command

parameters are shown in italics. (Optional parameters are shown in brackets

[ ].) Figure 58 on page 291 illustrates the printed output from this data.

The boldface line below the EXECUTE command represents the hexadecimal

EVFU load sequence which identifies the channel codes at which overlay

data will be placed on each form. The example hex values correspond to the

line identification codes listed above. Channel codes not described above as

Filler channels are assigned unique hex codes. Calls to these channels will

print overlay data at specific positions on the form.

The two ~AF lines, also shown in italics, represent the dynamic data. While

the EVFU does not affect dynamic data positioning (data placement is defined

by the ALPHA statement when the form was created), the commands are

shown to specify where they would occur in relation to the EXECUTE

command, the EVFU load sequence, and the overlay data.

289

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C Paper Motion Using the EVFU

The four lines of EVFU overlay data (shown in boldface type) follow the two

lines of dynamic data. This overlay data is positioned on the form according to

the specified channel codes called. The superscript hexadecimal numbers

enclosed in < > symbols represent calls to the four unique EVFU channel

codes.

(cc)EXECUTE; formname [;PAGE n] [;FC] [;ICNTn] [;IRSTn]

1E 10 11 11 11 1B 13 11 11 12 11 15 11 1F

~AF1;*DYNAMIC DATA #1*

~AF2;*DYNAMIC DATA #2*

^<13>DATA FOR LINE 6^<17>

^<10><12>DATA FOR LINE 9

^<1B>DATA FOR VERTICAL TAB CHANNEL

^<15>DATA FOR LINE 11

[Form Feed character]

(cc)NORMAL

When the IGP receives a channel call, it searches for that channel from the

current print position in the EVFU load sequence to the end of the EVFU load

sequence. If that channel is found, the current print position moves to that

position on the page. If the channel is not found, the search continues from

the beginning of the EVFU load sequence to the current print position. If this

search is successful, the current form is printed, the next form is called, and

the current print position moves to that position on the next page. If the

channel called is not found in either search, the channel call is treated as if it

were a line feed.

290

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

EVFU Example

EVFU Channel

Code Sent

Line No.

Form Output

Start Load

1 (TOF)

(top of form, Form #1)

Form

DATA FOR LINE 6

(undefined hex 17 causes single line feed)

1 (TOF)

(top of form, Form #2)

Form

DATA FOR LINE 9

1 (TOF)

(top of form, Form #3)

DATA FOR VERTICAL TAB CHANNEL

Form

DATA FOR LINE 11

End Load

Figure 58. Sample EVFU Form

291

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Appendix C Paper Motion Using the EVFU

292

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Index

Codabar, 91

Code 128A, 108

Code 128B, 108

Code 128C, 108

Code 39, 96

Alphanumeric

command, 29

data, 27

duplicating incremental fields, 41

dynamic data, 234

Code 93, 102

EAN 13, 123

EAN 8, 118

errors, 266

execute dynamic data, 62

execute overlay data, 67

increment fixed data, 38

incremental commands, 34

incremental dynamic data, 40, 66

Alphanumeric Data, 27

dynamic data, 27

FIM, 129

German I-2/5, 135

I-2/5, 135

Interleaved 2/5, 135

ITF-14, 135

Matrix, 141

MSI, 147

fixed data, 27

PostBar, 163

POSTNET, 158

Royal Mail, 163

Telepen, 167

UCC/EAN-128, 173

UPC-A, 185

incremental data, 27

overlay data, 27

Application identifiers

UCC/EAN-128, 174

ASCII Character Set, 277

Auto Increment Example, 225

UPC-E, 191

UPCSHIP, 198

UPS 11, 203

Bar Code

Batch form processing, 14

Bold Print See Font, 69

Box command, 43

duplicating incremental fields, 214

errors, 271

execute dynamic data, 63

features, 14

Box Errors, 264

incremental dynamic data, 66, 212

incremental fields, 208

overview, 87

Channel assignments

EVFU, 286

user-defined, 89

Character Position Dot Position (CP.DP) Format,

Bar Code Command, 233

Bar Codes

Character Set

293

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ASCII, 277

Code 39, 98

Character Sets

comments in command line, 25

Compressed Print, 45

Configuration (CONFIG), 46

Corner, 49

accessing, 253

extended, 14

multinational, 14

OCR, 253

Create, 51

user-defined, 254

Create Form Mode, 18, 19

Create Logo, 76, 237

Data Bit 8, 79

Character Sizes

Printable Data in Barcodes, 90

Characters

Delete Form, 52

height/width, 14

printable, 24

Delete Logo, 53

density, 45

rotated, 14

Directory, 53

Special Function Control Character, 23

Clearing EVFU memory, 288

Codabar, 91

directory, 247

Duplicating Incremental Alphanumerics, 41

EAN 13, 125

command format, 92

example, 95

EAN 8, 120

Emulation Switching, 57

Enable/Disable PI, 80

End, 57

Code 128A, 108

Code 128B, 108

command format, 110

example, 116

Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data, 62

Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data, 63

Execute Form Mode, 21, 234

Execute Incremental Dynamic Data, 65

Expanded Print, 68

Code 128C, 108

example, 117

Code 39, 96, 233

command format, 98

example, 101

FIM, 131

Font, 69

structure, 96

Form Length, 70

Code 93, 102

form name, 24

example, 107

format, 23

structure, 102

German I-2/5, 137

Command Parameters, 24

Command Standards

comments in command lines, 25

numeric values, 25

prompt, 25

Horizontal Duplication, 54

Horizontal Lines, 72

I-2/5, 137

Ignore Sequence (IGON/IGOFF), 71

Incremental Alphanumerics, 34

Incremental Alphanumerics Dynamic Data, 40

Incremental Alphanumerics Fixed Data, 38

Incremental Barcode Fixed Data, 211

Incremental Dynamic Alphanumeric Data, 66

Incremental Dynamic Bar Code Data, 66

inline commands, 23

Commands

alphanumerics, 29

Bar Code, 233

box, 43

Codabar, 92

Code 128B, 110

294

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ITF-14, 137

Corner Errors, 265

line printer emulation, 74

Line Spacing, 71

line terminator, 24

Listen, 74

CP.DP Format, 26

Create

character sets, 14

Create Command, 51

Create Errors, 268

Logo Call, 74

Matrix, 143

Create Form Mode, 18

Create Form Mode Commands, 19

Create Logo Mode, 18, 76

MSI, 149

Normal Mode, 16, 17, 78

Page Number, 78

Paper, 79

Dark Printing, 28

Data

Paper Instruction, data bit 8, 79

parameters, 24

PDF417, 153

alphanumeric, 22, 27

dynamic, 22

PostBar, 164

fixed, 22

POSTNET, 161

Print File, 80

incremental, 22, 27

overlay, 22

printable character, 24

Quiet, 81

placement, 22

prepositioned, 22

rotated, 14

Reset, 82

Reverse Print, 82

Royal Mail, 164

Scale, 83

storing, 25

Data Bit 8

multinational character sets, 253

paper instruction command, 79

Data Field

Select Format, 84

semicolon, 23

Setup, 81

updating, 22

spaces, 24

Debug Parameter, 51

Debugging Program Errors, 248

Debugging Programs, 261

Deleting

Special Function Control Character, 23

Telepen, 169

UPC-A, 187

UPC-E, 193

example, 248

UPCSHIP, 200

uppercase, 23

forms, 52

logos, 53

UPS 11, 204

Density, 29, 83

Vertical Duplication, 56, 243

Vertical Lines, 73

Density Command, 45

Designing Forms, 239

Directory Command, 53, 247

Disable IGP (quiet command), 81

DISK Parameter, 25

DIS-PI, 80

Comments

in command line, 25

Compressed Print, 29

Compressed Print Command, 45

Configuration Command, 46

Corner Command, 49

Double-strike Printing (DARK), 28

Duplicating Incremental Bar Codes, 214

295

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Dynamic Alphanumeric Data, 27, 29, 234

General programming information, 285

memory, clearing, 288

programming sequence See EVFU, 285

start load code, 286

EAN 13, 123

command format, 125

example, 128

Examples

auto increment fields, 225

Create Logo, 236

directory, 247

structure, 123

EAN 8, 118

command format, 120

example, 122

dynamic data, 218

EVFU, 289

structure, 118

forms, 215

Electronic Vertical Format Unit

format, 285

logo grid, 281

PostBar, 166

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU), 61

Elongated Characters, 29

Emulation Switching Command, 57

Enable IGP (listen command), 74

Enable/Disable PI, 80

End Command, 57

End Load Code, 286

EN-PI, 80

Royal Mail, 166

standard grid, 279

UCC/EAN-128, 182

Execute, 59

Dynamic Alphanumerics, 60, 62

Dynamic Bar Codes, 60, 63

Dynamic Logo, 60

Incremental Dynamic Alphanumerics, 60

Incremental Dynamic Bar Codes, 60

Overlay Data, 60, 67

Error Codes

purpose, 261

Errors, 262

Execute Dynamic Alphanumeric Data, 62

Execute Dynamic Bar Code Data, 63

Execute Dynamic Logo, 64

Execute Errors, 269

alphanumerics, 266

bar code, 271

box, 264

corners, 265

Execute Form

create, 268

dynamic alphanumeric data, 62

dynamic bar code data, 63

Dynamic Logo, 64

execute, 269

horizontal line, 262

incremental fields, 274

logo, 267

EVFU, 61

general format, 59

miscellaneous, 270

multinational character set, 274

reverse print, 273

solving program, 248

vertical lines, 263

EVFU, 61, 285

incremental dynamic data, 65

overlay data, 67

Execute Form Mode, 20, 58, 234

EVFU, 60

Execute Form Mode Commands, 21

Execute Incremental Dynamic Data, 65

Execute Overlay Data, 67

Expanded Print, 68

channel assignment, 286

clearing memory, 288

data, 60

Extended Character Sets, 251

example, 289

296

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

ISET command, 256

ICNT Parameter, 59, 65

idir parameter, 38, 66

Ignore Sequence Command (IGON/IGOFF), 71

IGON/IGOFF Command, 71

IGP

Features

alphanumeric data, 14

graphic capabilities, 14

IGP/PGL emulation, 13

incremental data, 22

modes, 15

operation, 14

Increment Form Count Parameter, 59, 65

Increment Reset Parameter, 59, 60, 65

Increment/decrement capability, 14

Incremental Alphanumeric Data, 27

Incremental Bar Code Fields, 208

Incremental Barcode Dynamic Data, 212

Incremental Barcode Fixed Data, 211

Incremental Dynamic Barcodes, 213

Incremental Fields Errors, 274

Incremental Fields Example, 225

Incrementing Alphanumeric Data, 34

Inline Commands, 23

FIM, 129

command format, 131

example, 133

structure, 129

Fixed Alphanumeric Data, 27

Font Command, 69

Form Count, 59

Form Design, 239

Form Examples

create basic form, 215

Form feed, paper motion using, 283

Form Layout, planning, 239

Form Length, 51

Interleaved 2/5, 135

IRST Parameter, 59, 60, 65

ISET Command, 256

Form Length Command, 70

Form Name, 24, 51, 59

Format

Italic Print, 69

ITF 14, 135

commands, 23

Layout, page, 239

German I-2/5, 135

Graphic

Line feed, paper motion using, 283

Line Printer Emulation Commands, 74

Line Spacing, 71, 83

Line Spacing Command, 71

Listen Command, 74

Logo, 236

scaling capabilities, 14

HDUP Command, 54

Horizontal Duplication Command, 54

Horizontal Line Errors, 262

Horizontal Lines Command, 72

HORZ Command, 72

Create command, 237

creating, 236

define, 237, 239

features, 14

Logo Call Command, 74

Logo Errors, 267

I-2/5

Logos, deleting, 53

LPI, 83

command format, 137

example, 140

structure, 135

297

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Matrix, 141

commands, 143

Page Layout Considerations, 239

Page Number Command, 78

Pagination, 59, 78

example, 146

structure, 141

Paper Command, 79

Paper motion, vertical, 283

PDF417

Memory, 25

Miscellaneous Errors, 270

Mode

command format, 153

example, 157

Create Logo, 236

Execute Form, 234

Modes

PI line paper motion, 283

PION/PIOFF Command, 79

Point Size, 69

Create Logo, 76

Execute Form, 58

Normal, 78

PostBar, 163

command format, 164

example, 166

Modes of Operation

Create Form, 18

POSTNET, 158

Create Logo, 18

command format, 161

structure, 158

Execute Form, 20

introduction, 15

Power-Up Character Set Selection

multinational character sets, 253

Normal, 16

MSI, 147

command format, 149

example, 152

boundaries, 18

reversed, 14

structure, 147

Print File Command, 80

Printable Character Delimiter, 24

Printable Data Field, Character Sizes, 90

Prompt, 25

Multinational Character Set

features, 251

OCR character sets, 253

user-defined sets, 254

Multinational Character Set Errors, 274

Multinational Character Sets

data bit 8, 253

Quiet Command, 81

ISET command, 256

power-up selection, 253

Relative line slewing (PI line), 283

Repeat Count Parameter, 38, 66, 211

Reset Command, 82

Reset Count Parameter, 39, 67, 211

Reverse Print, 29

Normal Mode, 16, 78

Numeric Values

Reverse Print Command, 82

Reverse Print Errors, 273

Rotated Characters, 30

used in command format, 25

OCR Character Sets, 253

Royal Mail, 163

Overlay Alphanumeric Data, 27

command format, 164

298

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

example, 166

standard command format, 179

structure, 173

RPT Parameter, 38, 66, 211

RST Parameter, 39, 67, 211

UPC-A, 185

command format, 187

example, 190

Scale Command, 83

structure, 185

Scaling

UPC-E, 191

capabilities, 14

command format, 193

example, 197

Select Format Command, 84

Semicolon, 23

structure, 191

SETUP Command, 81

Setup Files Feature, 85

SFCC, 23

UPCSHIP, 198

command format, 200

example, 202

SFON/SFOFF Command, 84

Slant (italic) Print, 69

structure, 198

Uppercase, 23

Special Function Control Character (SFCC), 23

Standard Command Format

UCC/EAN-128, 179

Uppercase Parameter, 30

UPS 11, 203

command format, 204

example, 207

Start load code, 286

EVFU, 286

structure, 203

STARTDATA Parameter, 39, 67, 212

STEPMASK Parameter, 38, 66, 211

Storing Data, 25

User-Defined Bar Code

variable ratio size (D), 89

User-Defined Character Sets

multinational, 254

Symbol Set See Configuration, ISET, USET, 69

Symset, 69

USET Command, 254

Telepen, 167

Variable Ratio Size (D)

command format, 169

example, 172

user-defined bar code, 89

VDUP Command, 56

structure, 167

VERT Command, 73

Terminator, line, 24

Vertical Duplication Command, 56, 243

Vertical Formatting, 61

Vertical Line Errors, 263

Vertical Lines Command, 73

Vertical paper motion, 283

UC Parameter, 30

UCC/EAN-128

application identifiers, 174

examples, 182

299

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

300

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Hewlett-Packard Company

Manual Part Number

171250-001PX

171250-001A

Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.

Peavey Car Speaker PV 15M User Manual
Philips Camcorder 27SPORTS User Manual
Philips Car Stereo System HDRW 720 17 User Manual
Philips CRT Television 14PT1547 User Manual
Philips Water Heater AZ1500 User Manual
Pioneer DVD Recorder DVR 550H K User Manual
Polycom IP Phone 1725 30960 001 User Manual
Poulan Snow Blower 422075 User Manual
ProForm Exercise Bike PFEL05807 User Manual
ProForm Home Gym 831288230 User Manual